Dvor 432

Reference No.
83130 55024
DVOR 432
VHF Omnidirectional Radio Range
Doppler
Technical Manual
Part 2
Operation and Maintenance
As for details, the electrical and mechanical information given in the

documentation supplied with each equipment prevails
All rights reserved

E 2004
Thales ATM GmbH
Stuttgart
Printed in Germany
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

NAVAIDS
Conventional Navaids Documentation Structure
DVOR 432
The equipment documentation comprises:
Part Technical Manuals Code No.

1 Equipment Description (incl. Annex NF) 83130 55023
2 Operation and Maintenance (incl. Annex NF) 83130 55024
Volume Drawing Set Code No.

Standard
A Delivery List, Parts List, 83051 48620
Schematic diagrams and Layout Drawings
B Delivery List, Parts List, 83051 48620
C Delivery List, Parts List, 83051 48620
Nextfield (option)
A Delivery List, Parts List, 83051 48640
B Delivery List, Parts List, 83051 48640
C Delivery List, Parts List, 83051 48640
Ed. 01.04

DVOR 432
Operation and Maintenance Preliminary Remarks
PRELIMINARY REMARKS
The equipment manuals for DVOR 432 (50 W and 100 W, single or dual) comprise:
PART CONTENTS CODE NO.

1 Equipment Description 83130 55023
2 Operation and Maintenance 83130 55024
This Technical Manual Part 2 includes the Operation and Maintenance with the chapters below:
1 General Information
2 Installation
3 Operation
4 Alignment Procedure
5 Maintenance
6 Fault Location and Repairs
Annex DVOR Nextfield (optional)
The 50 W and 100 W installations differ only slightly with respect to equipment, functions and operaĆ
tion, separate descriptions are not therefore provided for these two versions, but instead any special
features of either are pointed out. The content of part 1 "Equipment Description" will as well-known
presupposed. Installation and allignment procedure of the nextfield monitoring option is described
in the Annex to this manual.
Since it is not possible to include modifications, such as those which may be made to circuitry details
or dimensioning in the interests of technical progress, in the Technical Manual, we should point out
that questions of detail should always be answered using the technical documentation supplied with
the system. It is possible that reference numbers of drawings or subassemblies used in this descripĆ
tion are no longer contained in the set of drawings supplied (Volume A to C), but rather than (to conĆ
form with the system) they have been replaced by new drawings with another number. Please carry
out a once-only check on the basis of delivery list supplied and exchange where appropriate.
Description and use of the PC User Program will be found in the Technical Manual ADRACS, Code
No. 83140 55324.
MARK SYMBOLS
To get the best out of the navigation systems Navaids 400 you should study the contents of this manuĆ
al carefully. In particular you should familiarize yourself with the marks given in this manual which are
highlighted for easy recognition:
CAUTION WARNING
Cautions call attention to methods Warnings call attention to methods,

and procedures which must be procedures or limits which must be
followed to avoid damage to followed precisely to avoid injury to
equipment. persons.
NOTE or REMARK : For more information about operations.
Ed. 01.04 A

DVOR 432
Preliminary Remarks Operation and Maintenance
Table of effective pages

Basic edition: 01.02 / Revised edition: 01.04
Pages Ed.-No. Remarks
Title 01.04
A to B 01.04
I to X 01.04
AV-1 to 16 01.04
1-1 to 10 01.04
2-1 to 46 01.04
3-1 to 16 01.04
4-1 to 32 01.04
5-1 to 14 01.04
6-1 to 36 01.04
Annex 01.04 DVOR Nextfield (optional)
Trademarks: Microsoft and MS-DOS are registered trademarks, WINDOWS is a trademark of the Microsoft Corporation. IBM is a registered trademark of the International
Business Corporation. Pentium is a registered trademark of the Intel Corporation. All other mentioned product names may be trademarks of the respective
manufacturers and must be observed.
Note Despite of careful editing work technical inaccuracies and printing faults cannot be excluded in this publication. Change of text remains reserved without notification.
B Ed. 01.04

DVOR 432
Operation and Maintenance Table of Contents
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Title Page
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1.1 STORING AND UNPACKING THE EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.1.2 Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.2 STORING AND UNPACKING THE DVOR ANTENNAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1.3.1 Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1.3.1.1 General Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1.3.1.2 Precautionary Measures against Damage caused by Animals . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1.3.1.3 Equipment Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1.3.2 Personnel Requirement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
1.3.3 Tools and Special Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
1.4 LIST OF RECOMMENDED INSTRUMENTS AND ACCESSORIES . . . . . . . . . 1-7
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

2.1 SELECTING THE INSTALLATION SITE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.2 FOUNDATIONS FOR DVOR COUNTERPOISE AND SHELTER . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.3 DVOR CONTAINER SHELTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.3.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.3.2 Transportation and Installation of the Container Shelter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.4 INSTALLATION OF THE DVOR ANTENNAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2.4.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2.4.1.1 Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2.4.2 Antenna mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2.4.2.1 Lifting the Antennas onto the Counterpoise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2.4.2.2 Installation of the Carrier Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2.4.2.3 Installation of the Sideband Antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
2.4.3 RF Cabling of Antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2.4.3.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2.4.3.2 Carrier Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2.4.3.3 Sideband Antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2.4.4 Preliminary Settings and mechanical Alignment of the Sideband . . . . . . 2-13
Antennas
Ed. 01.04 I

DVOR 432
Table of Contents Operation and Maintenance
Section Title Page
2.4.5 Installation of the Monitor Dipole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15

2.4.6 Conversion of S3000 Antennas to S4000/NAV400 Antennas . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
2.5 INSTALLATION AT THE RACK IN THE SHELTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
2.5.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
2.5.2 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
2.5.2.1 Power Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
2.5.2.2 Connection of Battery Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
2.5.3 Connections at Transmitter and ASU Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
2.5.3.1 RF/AF Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
2.5.3.2 Pin-Assignment ASU Interface Connector (intern, SubD, 37pin, female) . . 2-23
2.5.3.3 Connection ASU to Antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
2.5.4 External Interface Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
2.5.4.1 DME IDENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
2.5.4.2 DIAGNOSIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
2.5.4.3 LGM1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
2.5.4.4 LGM2/DME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
2.5.4.5 LGM3/NDB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
2.5.4.6 ANALOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
2.5.4.7 Local PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
2.5.4.8 VAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
2.5.4.9 OIO LCP IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
2.5.4.10 OIO LCP OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
2.5.5 External Interfaces, Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
2.5.5.1 Connection of Remote Control RMMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
2.5.5.2 Connection of a local PC or Laptop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
2.5.5.3 Connection of Voice Signal for VAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
2.5.5.4 Connection of auxiliary Inputs/Outputs (LCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
2.5.5.5 Connection of auxiliary Analog and Temp inputs (CSL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
2.6 GROUNDING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
2.6.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
2.6.2 Strip or mesh Ground Conductors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
2.6.3 Ground Rods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
2.6.4 Ground Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
2.6.5 Estimating the Ground Resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
II Ed. 01.04

DVOR 432
Section Title Page
2.6.6 Measuring the Ground Resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35

2.7 COLLOCATION WITH DME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
2.7.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
2.7.2 Connection of FSD 40/45 to DVOR 432 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
2.7.2.1 CSB-Version, I/O-panel at the rear of cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
2.7.2.2 CSB-Version, I/O-panel on top of the cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
2.7.2.3 IOM-Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
2.7.2.4 Configuration of DVOR 432 and DME FSD 40/45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
2.7.3 Connection of DME 415/435 to DVOR 432 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
2.7.3.1 Ident and RS232 connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
2.7.3.2 Configuration of DVOR 432 and DME 415/435 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
2.8 INSTALLATION OF THE DME ANTENNA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
CHAPTER 3 OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

3.1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.2 LOCAL CONTROL INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.2.1 Indication Lamps for Main Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.2.2 Liquid Crystal Display Screen for Indication and Control of the System . 3-2
3.2.2.1 General Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.2.2.2 Welcome Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3.2.2.3 System Status Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3.2.2.4 System Control Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
3.2.2.5 System DATA Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3.2.2.6 MENU LIST Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
3.2.3 Key-lock Switch on LCP front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
3.3 CONTROLS AND INDICATIONS ON THE SUBASSEMBLIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
3.4 NORMAL OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
3.4.1 Switching On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
3.4.2 Change over from Remote to Local (on LCI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
3.4.3 Change Over to Maintenance Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
3.4.4 Change over to Monitor Bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
3.4.5 Acoustic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
3.4.6 Monitoring ATIS or Voice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
3.4.7 Functional Check of Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
3.4.8 Switching Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Ed. 01.04 III

DVOR 432
Section Title Page
CHAPTER 4 ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

4.1 GENERAL PREREQUISITES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.2 FIRST SWITCHING ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4.3 MATCHING OF ANTENNAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4.4 CHECK OF DECOUPLING BETWEEN SIDEBAND ANTENNAS . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
4.5 CALIBRATION OF MONITORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
4.6 SETTING OF TRANSMITTERS AND MONITORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
4.7 RECORDING OF SIMULATOR-ERROR-CURVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
4.8 SETTING OF MONITOR ALARM LIMITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
4.9 BATTERY MONITORING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
4.10 NORMAL OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
4.11 FLIGHT CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
4.12 RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN THE MONITOR DISPLAY OF THE RF LEVEL . . 4-31
AND THE POWER
CHAPTER 5 MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

5.1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.2 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.2.1 Elimination of Static Charges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5.2.2 Damage check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5.2.3 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5.2.4 Documentation of System Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5.3 NORMAL MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5.3.1 Replacing the Lithium Batteries (MSP-C, MSP-VD, LCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5.3.2 Maintaining Emergency Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5.3.2.1 Battery Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5.3.3 Matching the Charging Voltage of BCPS Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5.3.3.1 Reasons for Voltage Matching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5.3.3.2 Matching the Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
5.4 STARTUP, CARE AND MAINTENANCE OF THE LEAD BATTERY . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
5.4.1 Startup Specifications for the Lead Battery in Navigation Installations . . 5-7
5.4.1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
5.4.1.2 Preliminary Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
5.4.1.2.1 Accumulator Acid and Specially Purified Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
5.4.1.2.2 Mixing Sulphuric Acid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
IV Ed. 01.04

DVOR 432
Section Title Page
5.4.1.2.3 Relationship between the Acid Density and the Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
5.4.1.2.4 Basic Rules for Handling Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
5.4.1.2.5 Filling the Batteries with Acid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
5.4.1.3 Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
5.4.1.3.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
5.4.1.3.2 Dry Pre-charged Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
5.4.1.3.3 Non Pre-charged Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
5.4.1.3.4 Initial Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
5.4.2 Care and Maintenance of the Lead Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
5.4.2.1 Maintenance Accessories and Scope of Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
5.4.2.1.1 Keeping the Lead Battery Clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
5.4.2.1.2 Measuring the Acid Density (not for maintenance-free batteries) . . . . . . . . . 5-14
5.4.2.1.3 Topping Up the Cells (not for maintenance-free batteries) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
5.4.2.1.4 Measuring the Cell Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
CHAPTER 6 FAULT LOCATION AND REPAIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

6.1 FAULT LOCATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.1.2 Fault Evaluation with PC and ADRACS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.1.3 Fault Location Support DVOR (50 W and 100 W) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.1.3.1 Power Supply and Module Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.1.3.2 Localization of the defective Equipment Part (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6.1.3.3 Status Check of the Microprocessor of the MSG-C (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6.1.3.4 RF-Level too low or missing (3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
6.1.3.5 Modulation Depth of Carrier too low (4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
6.1.3.6 Modulation by Sidebands too low or wrong (5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
6.1.3.7 Wrong Carrier Frequency (6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
6.1.3.8 Azimuth Indication (7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
6.1.3.9 Fault in the Monitor (8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
6.1.3.10 Fault of the Local Control Panel (LCP) (9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
6.2 REPAIRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
6.2.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
6.2.1.1 Safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
6.2.1.1.1 General regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
6.2.1.1.2 Work on the equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Ed. 01.04 V

DVOR 432
Section Title Page
6.2.1.1.3 Handling Electrostatically Sensitive Subassemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13

6.2.1.1.4 Components containing beryllium oxide ceramics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
6.2.1.1.5 Handling lead batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
6.2.2 Correcting a Processor Standstill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
6.2.2.1 Failure in the Monitor Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
6.2.2.2 Failure in the Transmitter Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
6.2.3 Replacing Subassemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
6.2.3.1 Disconnecting the Voltage before replacing Subassemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
6.2.3.2 Subassemblies in the Transmitter Rack and Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
6.2.3.2.1 Replacing EPROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
6.2.3.2.2 Creating new Checksum for MSP EPROM in ADRACS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
6.2.3.2.3 Replace and Reconfigure Subassembly LCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
6.2.3.3 DVOR antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
6.2.4 List of DIP-FIX-Switches and Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
6.2.4.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
VI Ed. 01.04

DVOR 432
LIST OF FIGURES
Fig.-No. Title Page
Fig. 1-1 DVOR in 10 ft container shelter for all types of transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Fig. 1-2 DVOR with packing for rail or road transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Fig. 1-3 Packaging for rail and road transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Fig. 1-4 Packaging for and transport of the DVOR antenna domes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Fig. 2-1 DVOR siting criteria (general data) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Fig. 2-2 Foundations for DVOR Shelter (for information only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Fig. 2-3 Foundations for DVOR counterpoise and shelter (for information only) . . . . 2-3
Fig. 2-4 10 ft DVOR container shelter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Fig. 2-5 Correct lifting with a lifting harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Fig. 2-6 Standard shelter, ground plan and electrical installation DVOR (example) . . 2-6
Fig. 2-7 Antenna ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Fig. 2-8 Pipes for guiding the antenna cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Fig. 2-9 Lifting equipment for DVOR antenna installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Fig. 2-10 Installation of vertical pipes and installation point of antenna 1 . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Fig. 2-11 Installation direction of vertical pipe and antenna dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Fig. 2-12 Spacing of vertical pipes of sideband antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Fig. 2-13 Antenna ring, single antenna and vertical pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Fig. 2-14 Connection diagram of individual radiators of the sideband antennas . . . . . 2-11
Fig. 2-15 Sideband antenna with matcher/decoupling module pulled out . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
(e.g.: antenna 2)
Fig. 2-16 Cabling of sideband antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Fig. 2-17 Cabling to the shelter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Fig. 2-18 Calibration capacitors on the antenna elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Fig. 2-19 Plate separation distance of capacitors CA as a function of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
the operating frequency
Fig. 2-20 Aligning the sideband antenna with the aid of bearing markers . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Fig. 2-21 Diagrammatic site layout of DVOR monitor dipole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Fig. 2-22 Mast with monitor dipole (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Fig. 2-23 Connections at the BCPS connection plate, C-bar and bottom plate . . . . . 2-20
(100 W version)
Fig. 2-24 Cabling, BCPS connection plate, C-bar and bottom plate (100 W version) 2-21
Fig. 2-25 DVOR transmitter and ASU rack, top view, connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Fig. 2-26 DVOR ASU rack, front side, connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Fig. 2-27 External wiring of auxiliary OIO connectors of LCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Ed. 01.04 VII

DVOR 432
Fig.-No. Title Page
Fig. 2-28 Interface connections transmitter cabinet, rear side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Fig. 2-29 System cabling DVOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Fig. 2-30 Different types of ground conductor configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Fig. 2-31 Determining of the ground resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
Fig. 2-32 Interface Assignment of LGM2 and DME-Ident in DVOR 432 . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Fig. 2-33 AF-distribution box, assignment of terminals (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Fig. 2-34 CSB-Version, I/O panel at cabinet rear side, connection DVOR to DME . . . 2-40
Fig. 2-35 CSB-Version, I/O panel at cabinet rear side, ident connection . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
DVOR to DME
Fig. 2-36 CSB-Version, I/O panel at cabinet rear side, RS 232 connection . . . . . . . . 2-40
DVOR/DME
Fig. 2-37 CSB-Version, I/O panel on cabinet top, connection DVOR to DME . . . . . . . 2-41
Fig. 2-38 CSB-Version, I/O panel on cabinet top, ident connection DVOR/DME . . . . 2-41
Fig. 2-39 CSB-Version, I/O panel on cabinet top, RS 232 connection DVOR/DME . . 2-41
Fig. 2-40 IOM-Version, connector panel at cabinet rear side, connection . . . . . . . . . 2-42
DVOR to DME
Fig. 2-41 IOM-Version, connector panel at cabinet rear side, ident connection . . . . 2-42
DVOR/DME
Fig. 2-42 IOM-Version, connector panel at cabinet rear side, RS 232 connection . . 2-42
DVOR/DME
Fig. 2-43 Cable connections to DVOR and DME FSD 40/45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
(DME with individual internal or external modem for RC connection)
Fig. 2-44 Cable connections to DVOR and DME 415/435 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
Fig. 2-45 Collocation CVOR/DVOR with DME 415/435 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Fig. 2-46 Ident connection CVOR/DVOR to DME 415/435 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Fig. 2-47 RS232 connection CVOR/DVOR to DME 415/435 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Fig. 2-48 Arrangement and installation of the DME antenna (example AAN 86), . . . . . 2-46
principle view
Fig. 3-1 Local Control Interface (LCI), example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Fig. 3-2 Liquid crystal display screen of the Local Control Interface (LCI), example . 3-2
Fig. 3-3 Welcome window, example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Fig. 3-4 System Status window with status 'NORMAL', example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Fig. 3-5 System Status window with status 'ALARM', both transmitters . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
are switched off (shut down), example
Fig. 3-6 System Status window with status 'Warning', examples 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Fig. 3-7 System Status window with status 'WARNING', examples 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
VIII Ed. 01.04

DVOR 432
Fig.-No. Title Page
Fig. 3-8 System Status window with status 'WARNING', example 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Fig. 3-9 System Control window TRANSMITTER CONTROLS, example . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Fig. 3-10 System Control window MONITOR CONTROLS, example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Fig. 3-11 DATA window to indicate monitoring data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Fig. 3-12 MENU LIST window, example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Fig. 3-13 Data Indication window AERIAL TRANSMITTER DATA, example . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Fig. 3-14 Key-lock switch and indication of operational mode on LCD screen, . . . . . 3-12
example
Fig. 3-15 Push buttons and indications on the subassemblies inside the rack (1) . . . . 3-14
Fig. 3-16 Push buttons and indications on the subassemblies inside the rack (2) . . . . 3-15
Fig. 4-1 Setting characteristics for DVOR-antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Fig. 4-2 Position of capacitors CA, CTr (antenna dome), C5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
(matcher/decoupling module)
Fig. 4-3 Test setup for matching measurements for DVOR-antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Fig. 4-4 Simulator test setup for DVOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Fig. 4-5 Transmitter rack, rear side, potentiometers on CCP-D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Fig. 4-6 Test log for simulator fault plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Fig. 5-1 Accumulator acid chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Fig. 5-2 Chart showing the relationship between the acid density and . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
the temperature
Fig. 6-1 Push buttons and indications on the subassemblies MSP and . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
MSG-C in the rack
Fig. 6-2 Preparation and adjustments during a subassembly replacement . . . . . . . . 6-18
Fig. 6-3 LCP front panel and LCP control menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Ed. 01.04 IX

DVOR 432
X Ed. 01.04

NAVAIDS 400
Conventional Navaids List of Abbreviations
ABKÜRZUNGSVERZEICHNIS
LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS
LISTE D'ABRÉVIATIONS
LISTA DE ABREVIATURAS
A Antenne
Antenna
Antena
AC Alternating Current
Courant alternatif
Corriente alterna
ACA Analogical Carrier Amplifier (BITE signal)
Amplificateur pour porteurs analogiques (signal BITE)
Amplificdor portador analogico (señal BITE)
ACC Alternating Current Converter
ADC Analog-Digital Converter
Convertisseur analogique/numérique
Convertidor analógico/digital
ADCS Analog-to-digital Converter Subsystem
Sous-système convertisseur analogique/numérique
Subsistema convertidor analógico/digital
ADR Analog Display Routine
Routine affichage analogique
Rutina de indicator analógico
ADRACS Automatic Data Recording And Control System
ADSB Alternating Double Sideband
Bande latérale double alternante
Banda lateral doble alternante
ADU Antenna Distribution Unit
Antennen-Verteileinheit
Ensemble de distribution d'antenne
Unidad de distribución de antena
AF Audio Frequency
Basse fréquence
Audiofrequencia
AFC Automatic Frequency Control
Commande automatique par fréquence
Control automático de frecuencia
AGC Automatic Gain Control
Commande automatique de gain
Control automático de ganancia
AM Amplitude Modulation
Modulation d'amplitude
Modulación de amplitud
Ed. 01.04 AV-1

NAVAIDS 400
List of Abbreviations Conventional Navaids
AMP AMPlifier
Amplificateur
Amplificador
ANSI American National Standards Institute
ASB Alternating SideBand
Bandes latérales alternantes
Banda lateral alternante
ASC Antenna Switch Control
Commutateur d'antennes de commande
Control de conmutador de antena
ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange
Code standard américain pour l'échange d'informations
Código stándard americano para el intercambio de informaciones
ASM Antenna Switch Module
Module de commutateur d'antennes
Módulo de conmutador de antena
ASU Antenna Switching Unit
Ensemble de commutation d'antennes
Unidad de conmutación de antena
ATC Air Traffic Control
Contrôle du trafic aérien
Control del tráfico aéreo
ATIS Air Traffic Information System
Système d'informations du trafic aérien
Sistema de informaciones del tráfico aéreo
ATM Air Traffic Management
AWD Automatische Wähleinrichtung für Datenverbindungen
Automatic dialling equipment for data connections
Dispositif automatique de sélection pour liaisons d'acheminement de données
Dispositivo automático de selección para comunicaciones de datos
BAZ Back-Azimuth
BCD Binär Codiert Dezimal
Binary Coded decimal
BCPS Battery Charging Power Supply
Chargeur de batterie et bloc d'alimentation
Chargador de bateria y equipo de alimentación
BD Baud
Baud
Baudio
BF Basse Fréquency
Audio Frequency
Baja frecuencia (audiofrecuencia)
BIT(E) Built-in Test (Equipment)
Dispositif de test intégré
Dispositivo de test integrado
AV-2 Ed. 01.04

NAVAIDS 400
BKZ BefehlsKennZahl
Command code number
Numéro indicatif de commande
Número indicador de orden
BNC Bayonet Navy Connector
Koaxialverbinder mit Bayonetkupplung
BP Backplane
Rückwandverdrahtung
bro. broches
polig
pin
BSE Betriebs- und Schutzerde
System and protective ground
Prise de terre de système et terre de protection
Puesta a tierra del sistema y de protección
BSG-D Blending Signal Generator
Générateur de signaux de transition
Generador de señal de transición
BST Baustahl
Structure steel
Acier de construction
Acero de construcción
BUSGNT Bus Grant
Autorisation de bus
Autorización de bus
BUSRQ Bus Request
Demande de bus
Solicitud de bus
CA Carrier Amplifier
CAB Cabinet
Armoire
Armario
CAT Category
Kategorie
Category
Categoría
CCA Circuit Card Assembly
Baugruppe
Assemblage de la carte de circuit
CCITT Commitée Consultatif International Téléphonique et Télégraphique
International Telegraph and Telephone Consultative Committee
CCP Control Coupler
Coupleur de commande
Acoplador de control
Ed. 01.04 AV-3

NAVAIDS 400
CDI Course Deviation Indicator
Indicateur de déviation (cap)
Indicador de desviaciòn de rumbo
CD-ROM Compact Disc - Read Only Memory
Disque compact -Mémoire à lecture
Disco compacto - Memoria permanente
CE Conformité Européen oder/or/ou Communautés Européennes
CEE International Commmision on Rules for the Approval of Electrical Equipment
CLR; CL Clearance signal
Signal de Clearance
Señal de Clearance
CMOS Complementary Metaloxide Semiconductor
Semi-conducteur oxyde métallique complémentaire
Semiconductor complementario de óxido metálico
CONC Phone Concentrator
Telefon-Umschalteinrichtung
Installation de commutation téléphonique
Centralilla teléfonica
CPU Central Processing Unit
Zentrale Prozessoreinheit
CR Carriage Return
Retour du chariot
Retorno de carro
CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check
CRT Cathode Ray Tube
Tube cathodique
Tubo catódico
CRS; CS Course signal
Kurssignal
Signal de directif
Señal de rumbo
CSB (1) Carrier signal with SideBands (HF)
Signal de porteuse avec bandes latérales
Señal de portadora con bandas laterales
CSB (2) Control&Status Board (part of the LCSU)
CSL Control and Selector Logic
Logique de commande et de sélection
Lógica de control y de selección
CTOL Conventional Take-off and Landing
Décollage et atterrissage classiques
Despegue y aterrizaje convencionales
CTS Clear to Send
Prêt à émettre
Listo para transmitir
AV-4 Ed. 01.04

NAVAIDS 400
CW Continuous Wave
Fortlaufende Welle
Ondes continues
Ondas continuos
DAC Digital/Analog Converter
Convertisseur numérique/analogique
Convertidor digital/analógico
DAS DME-based Azimuth System
Système d'azimut basé DME
Sistema de acimut basado en DME
DC Direct Current
Courant continu
Corriente continua
DCC DC-Converter
Convertisseur de courant continu (Convertisseur CC)
Convertidor de corriente continua (convertidor CC)
DCC-MV DC-Converter Multivolt
Convertisseur CC-Multivolt
Convertidor CC-Multivolt
DCC-MVD DC-Converter Multivolt Doppler
Convertisseur CC-Multivolt Doppler
Convertidor CC-Multivolt Doppler
DDM Difference in Depth of Modulation
Differenz der Modulationsgrade
Différence de taux de modulation
Diferencia de grados de modulación
DDS Direct Digital Synthesis
DFS Deutsche Flugsicherung
Administration of air navigation services
Bureau de la sécurité aérienne
Instituto de protección de vuelo
DFT Diskrete Fourier Transformation
Discrete Fourier Transformation
DIF Differenzsignal
Difference signal
Signal différentiel
Señal diferencial
DIN Deutsche Industrie Norm
German industrial standard
Norme industrielle allemande
Norma industrial alemana
DIP Dual-In-Line Package
DME Distance Measuring Equipment
Equipement de mesure de la distance
Equipo de medición de la distancia
Ed. 01.04 AV-5

NAVAIDS 400
DSB Double Sideband
Bandes latérales doubles
Banda lateral doble
DSP Digital Signal Processing
Digitaler Signal Prozessor
DSR Data Set Ready
Enregistrement des données prêt
Registro de datos listo
DTR Data Terminal Ready
Terminal de données prêt
Terminal de datos listo
DU Distribution Unit
Verteilereinheit
Ensemble de distribution
Unidad de distribución
DVOR Doppler Very High Frequency Omnidirectional Radio Range
Radiophare omnidirectionnel VHF Doppler
Radiofaro omnidireccional VHF Doppler
EC European Community
ECU Executive Control Unit
Ausführende Steuereinheit
Ensemble de contrôl exécutif
Unidad de control ejecución
EEPROM Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory
Mémoire à lecture seule, programmable et erasable électrique
Memoria permanente borrable eléctricamente y programada
EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility
Elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit
ENBT Enable Bus Transfer
Validation transfert de bus
Conexión transferencia de bus
EPLD Electrically Programmable Logic Device
Elektrisch programmierbare Schaltungseinheit
Montage programmable électrique
Circuito programado eléctricamente
EPROM Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory
Mémoire à lecture seule, programmable et erasable
Memoria permanente borrable y programada
EUROCAE European Organization for Civil Aviation Electronics
Organisation européenne pour l'électronique de l'aviation civile
Organización europea para la electrónica de la aviacion civil
FAA Federal Aviation Administration

Administration fédérale de l'aviation
Administración federal de aviación
AV-6 Ed. 01.04

NAVAIDS 400
FET Feldeffekttransistor
Field-effect transistor
FFM Farfield Monitor
(FF) Moniteur de champ lointain (zone Fraunhofer)
Monitor campo lejano
FIFO First In/First Out
Premier entré/premier sortie
Primera entrada/primera salida
FM Frequency Modulation
Modulation de fréquence
Modulación de frecuencia
FPE Functional Protection Earth
Betriebsschutzerde
FSK Frequency-Shift Keying
Frequenzumtastverfahren
Manipulation par déplacement de fréquence
Método de manipulación de frecuencia
GP, GS Glide Slope, Glide Path
Gleitweg
Radiophare d'alignement de descente
Transmisor de trayectoria de descenso
HF Hochfrequenz
Radio frequency
Haute fréquence
Alta frecuencia
IC Integrated Circuit
Integrierter Schaltkreis
Circuit intégré
Circuito integrado
ICAO International Civil Aviation Organization
Organisation de l'aviation civile internationale (OACI)
Organización de aviación civil international (OACI)
ILS Instrument Landing System
Système d'atterrissage aux instruments
Sistema de aterrizaje por instrumentos
IM Inner Marker
Radiobalise intérieure
Radiobaliza interior
INC Indication and Control
Anzeige und Steuerung
Indicateur et contrôle
Panel de indicaciones y control
INT Interface Unit
Schnittstelleneinheit
Unité d'interface
Unidad de interfase
Ed. 01.04 AV-7

NAVAIDS 400
INTFC Interface Board for monitor
Schnittstellenkarte für Monitor
Platine d'interface du moniteur
Placa enchufable de la interfase de monitor
I/O-Port Input/Output-Port
Ein-/Ausgabeport
Porte d'entrée/sortie
Puerto de entrada/salida
ISO International Organization for Standardization
Internationale Organisation für Normung
Organisation Internationale de Normalisation
I/Q In Phase/Quadraturphase
In-phase/Quadratur-phase
KADP Kabeladapter
Cable adapter
Adaptateur de cable
Adaptador de cable
LCC Local Communication Control
LCD Liquid Crystal Display
Ecran à cristaux liquides
Indicador de cristal liquido
LCI Local Control Interface
Interface de commande locale
LCP Local Control Panel
Panneau de commande locale
LCSU Local Control and Status Unit
LCU Local Communication Unit
LED Light Emitting Diode
Diode électroluminiscente
Diodo electroluminiscente
LF Line Feed
Avancement de ligne
Avance de línea
LG-A Localizer/Glide Path - Audio Generator
LLZ/GP - Générateur Audio
LG-M Localizer/Glide Path - Monitor Processor
LLZ/GP - Processeur du Moniteur
LGM Modembezeichnung (LOGEM)
Modem assignation
LLZ/LOC Localizer
Radiophare d'alignement de piste
Localizador
AV-8 Ed. 01.04

NAVAIDS 400
LP Leiterplatte
Printed circuit board
Plaquette à circuits imprimé
Placa de circuito impreso
LPF Low Pass Filter
Filtre passe-bas
Filtro de paso bajo
LRCI Local/Remote Communication Interface
LRU Line Replaceable Unit
LSB (1) Lower Sideband (HF DVOR)
Bandes latérales inférieures
Banda lateral inferior
LSB (2) Least Significant Bit (digital)
m Modulationsgrad
Mod-Depth
Taux de modulation
Profundidad (grado) de modulación
MEU Marker Extension Unit
Unité de radiobalise d'extension
Fuente de alimentación suplementaria de la radiobaliza
MIA Monitor Interface Adapter
Adapteur d'interface du moniteur
Adaptador de la interfase de monitor
MIB Monitor Interface Board
Platine d'interface du moniteur
Placa enchufable de la interfase de monitor
MLS Microwave Landing System
Système d'atterrissage aux micro-ondes
Sistema de aterrizaje por microondas
MM Middle Marker
Radiobalise médiane
Radiobaliza intermedia
MOD Modulation
Modulation
Modulación
MODPA Modulator/Power Amplifier
Modulateur/Amplificadeur de puissance
Modulador/AmplificadorAlimentación
MOD-SBB Modulator Sideband Blending (DVOR)
Modulateur de transition des bandes latérales
Modulador de transición de banda lateral
MON Monitor
Moniteur
Monitor
Ed. 01.04 AV-9

NAVAIDS 400
MOS Metallic Oxide Semiconductor
Semi-conducteur métal oxyde
Semiconductor de óxido metálico
MPS Minimum Performance Specification
Spécification de rendement minimum
Especificación de rendimiento mínimo
MPU Marker Processing Unit
Unité de marqueur de traitement
Procesador de radiobaliza
MSB Most Significant Bit
MSG Modulation Signal Generator
Générateur de signaux de modulation
Generador de señal de modulación
MSP Monitor Signal Processor
Processeur de signaux de moniteur
Procesador de señal de monitor
MSR Monitor Service Routine
Routine de service de moniteur
Rutina de servicio de monitor
MTBF Meantime between Failures
Temps moyen entre défauts
Tiempo medio entre fallos
MTTR Meantime to Repair
Temps moyen de réparation
Tiempo medio de reparacion
MUX Multiplexer
Multiplexeur
Multiplexor
MV Multivolt
NAV Navigation
Navigation
Navigation
Navegación
NAVAIDS Navigational Aids
Navigationsanlagen
Aide de navigation
Radioayudas a la navegación
NC Normally closed
Normalement fermé
Normalmente cerrado
NDB Non-Directional radio Beacon
Radiophare omnidirectional
Radiofaro omnidireccional
AV-10 Ed. 01.04

NAVAIDS 400
NF Niederfrequenz
Audio frequency
Basse fréquence
Baja frecuencia
NFK Niederfrequenzknoten (Sternverteiler)
Star distributor (for audio frequency)
NFM Nearfield Monitor
Moniteur de champ proche
Monitor campo cercano
NM Nautical Mile
Mile nautique
Milla náutica
NO Normally open
Normalement ouvert
Normalmente abierto
OAB Optocoupler Adapter Board
Platine d'adaptateur d'optcoupleur
Placa enchufable del adaptador optoacoplador
OACI Organisation de l'aviation civile internationale (= ICAO)
International Civil Aviation Organization
Organización de aviación civil international
OIO Opto Coupler Isolated Input/Output
OM Outer Marker
Radiobalise extérieure
Radiobaliza exterior
PC Personal Computer
PCB Printed Circuit Board
Carte à circuit imprimé
Tarjeta de circuito impreso
PDME Precision DME
DME de précision
DME de precición
PE Protection Earth
PEP Peak Envelope Power
Spitzenleistung
Puissance de pointe
Potencia punta
PLL Phase Locked Loop
Boucle à verrouillage de phase
Bucle de bloqueo de fase
PM Phase Modulation
Pasenmodulation
Modulation de phase
Modulación de fase
Ed. 01.04 AV-11

NAVAIDS 400
PMC Phase Monitor and Control
Moniteur de phase et commande
Monitor de fase y control
PMM Power Management Module
POP Power on Parallel
POSN./Pos. Position
Axe
Posición
PROM Programmable Read Only Memory
Mémoire à lecture seule et programmable
Memoria permanente programada
PRUM Protector Unit Marker
Radiobalise d'unité de protection
Unidad de protección de la radiobaliza
PRUT Protector Unit Tower
Unité de protection
Unidad de protección
PS Power Supply
Bloc d'alimentation
Equipo de alimentación
PSI Power Supply Interface
Interface du bloc d'alimentation
Interfase equipo de alimentación
PSS Power Supply Switch
PSW Interrupteur de puissance
Interruptor de alimentación
PSN Position
Position
Axe
Posición
PSTN Public Switched Telephone Network
PTT Post Telephone and Telecommunications (Authority)
PVC Polyvinylchlorid
Polyvinyl chloride
Chlorure de polyvinyl (C.P.V.)
Chloruro de polivinilo
PWR Password Routine
Routimne de mot de passe
Rutina de contrasena
RAM Random Access Memory
Mémoire à accés aléatoire
Memoria de acceso aleatorio
RC Remote Control
Télécommande
Control remoto
AV-12 Ed. 01.04

NAVAIDS 400
RCMS Remote Control Monitoring System
Système de télécommande et de surveillance
Sistema de control y monitoreo remotos
RCSE Remote Control and Status Equipment
RCSR Remote Control Service Routine
Routine de service de télécommande
Rutina de servicio de control remoto
RCSU Remote Control Status Unit
REU Remote Electronic Unit
RF Radio Frequency
Haute fréquence (HF)
Radiofrecuencia
RIA Remote Interface Adapter
Adaptateur d'interface de télécommande
Adaptador de interfase telemando
RIAX Remote Interface Adapter extended
Adaptateur d'interface de télécommande étendé
Adaptador suplementario de interfase telemando
RISC Reduced Instruction Set Computing
Rechner mit reduziertem Befehlssatz
RL Radio link
Richtfunkverbindung
Liaison hetzienne
Radioenlace dirigido
RMMC Remote Monitoring and Maintenance Configuration
ROM Read Only Memory
Mémoire à lecture seule
Memoria permanente
RST Restart
Remettre en marche
Nueva puesta en marche
RTC Real Time Clock
Echtzeituhr
Rythme en temps réel
Reloj en tiempo real
RTCR Real Time Clock Routine
Routine de rythme en temps réel
Rutina de reloj en tiempo real
RTS Request to send
Marche l'émetteur
Activación del transmisor
RWY Runway
Landebahn
Piste d'aviation
Pista de aterrizaje
Ed. 01.04 AV-13

NAVAIDS 400
RX Receiver
Récepteur
Receptor
RXC Receiver Clock
Rythme du récepteur
Reloj de receptor
RXD Receiver Data
Données de récepteur
Datos de receptor
RXRDY Receiver Ready
Récepteur prêt
Receptor listo
S Switch
Commutateur
Conmutador
SB Sideband
Bandes latérales
Banda lateral
SB1, SB2 Sideband 1, Sideband 2
Bandes latérales 1, 2
Banda lateral 1, 2
SBA Sideband A (used in VOR)
Bandes latérales A (utilizé en VOR)
Banda lateral A (utilizado para VOR)
SBB Sideband B (used in VOR)
Bandes latérales B (utilizé en VOR)
Banda lateral B (utilizado para VOR)
SBO Sideband Only
Bandes latérales seulement
Banda lateral solamente
SBR Subrack
Sous-bâti
Subrack (con junto)
SCC Serial Communication Controller
SDM Sum of Depths of Modulation
Somme des taux de modulation
Suma de grado de modulación
SMA Subminiature connector type A
Miniatur HF-Steckverbinder für Mikrowellenanwendungen
SPDT Single Pole Double Throw
Commutateur unipolaire
Conmutador unipolar doble
SP3T Single Pole 3 Throw
Commutateur unipolaire triple
Conmutador unipolar triple
AV-14 Ed. 01.04

NAVAIDS 400
STOL Short Take-Off and Landing
Système de décollage et d'atterissage court
Despegue y aterrizaje corto
SUM Summensignal
Summation Signal
Signal de la somme
Señal de suma
SW Software
SYN (1) Synchronisation
Synchronisation
Sincronización
SYN (2) Synthesizer
TACAN Tactical Air Navigation
Navigation aérienne tactique
Navigación aérea táctica
TCXO Temperature Compensated Crystal Oscillator
Temperatur kompensierter Quarzoszillator
Oscillateur à quartz compensé par témperature
Oscilador de cuarzo termo compensado
TEG Test Generator
Générateur de test
Generador de test
THR Threshold
Schwellwert
Valeur de seuil
Nivel determinado
TNC Threaded Navy Connector
Koaxialverbinder mit Gewindekupplung
TNV Telephone Network Voltage
TOR Time Out Routine
Routine de temps de suspension
Rutina de tiempo de suspensión
TTL Transistor-Transistor Logic
Logique transistor-transistor
Lógica transistor - transistor
TX Transmitter
Emetteur
Transmisor
TXC Transmitter Clock
Rythme d'émetteur
Reloj de transmisor
TXD Transmitter Data
Données d'émetteur
Datos de transmisor
Ed. 01.04 AV-15

NAVAIDS 400
TXRDY Transmitter Ready
Emetteur prêt
Transmisor listo
USART Universal Synchronous/Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter
Récepteur/émetteur universel synchrone/asynchrone
Receptor/transmisor universal síncrono/asíncrono
USB Upper Sideband (HF DVOR)
Bandes latérales supérieures
Banda lateral superior
UV Ultraviolet
Ultraviolet
Ultravioleta
VAM Voice Amplifier
Amplificateur vocal
Amplificador vocal
VCO Voltage Controlled Oscillator
VGA Video Graphic Adapter
VHF Very High Frequency
Hyperfréquence
Hiperfrecuencia
VOR Very High Frequency Omnidirectional Radio Range
Radiophare omnidirectionnel VHF
Radiofaro omnidireccional VHF
VSWR Voltage Standing Wave Ratio
Taux d'ondulation
Grado de ondulación
VTOL Vertical Take-off and Landing
Décollage et atterrissage verticaux
Despegue y aterrizaje vertical
WI Width signal
Breite-Signal
Signal faisceau
WT Wechselstrom-Telegrafie
Voice-frequency carrier telegraphy
Télégraphie harmonique à ondes porteuses
Telegrafía armónica
ZU Zeichenumsetzer
Modem for data transfer
Convertisseur de signaux
Convertidor de señal
AV-16 Ed. 01.04

DVOR 432
Operation and Maintenance General Information
CHAPTER 1
GENERAL INFORMATION
1.1 STORING AND UNPACKING THE EQUIPMENT
1.1.1 General
The equipment should be unpacked as soon as possible in order to check that it is complete and
intact. The place of storage used for any intermediate storage period must be dry. The temperature
range specified in the technical data in Part 1 must be conformed with. The table below is an example
of the type of packing.
PackĆ Contents Code No. Dimensions with Gross weight

age packaging (mm) (kg)
1 1 Shelter equipped : 3000 x 2440 x 2440 2,500
cabinet DVOR (equipped)
- 50 W dual or single or 83011 40300 / 40350
- 100 W dual or single 83011 40400 / 40450
Antenna Switching Unit 83135 10400

(ASU, equipped)
enclosed:
51 Antenna Domes 58370 34001
51 Vertical Pipes 38175 28159
50 Decoupling Modules 58300 34010
Documentation DVOR
Fig. 1-1 DVOR in 10 ft container shelter for all types of transport
PackĆ Contents Code. No. Dimensions with Gross

age packaging (mm) weight (kg)
1 1 Cabinet DVOR (equipped) 1940 x 830 x 880* approx. 279
1980 x 880 x 890** approx. 323
- 50 W dual or single or 83011 40300 / 40350
- 100 W dual or single 83011 40400 / 40450
2 1 Antenna Switching Unit 83135 10400 1940 x 830 x 880* approx. 159
(ASU, equipped) 1980 x 880 x 890** approx. 203
3 Documentation DVOR
* Corrugated paper container ** wooden crate
Fig. 1-2 DVOR with packing for rail or road transport
1.1.2 Unpacking
The equipment and components are also packed in wooden crates for transport by sea. These woodĆ
en crates should always be deposited with the side marked "Oben" (Top) facing upwards.
- Open the lid of these crates using a hammer and nail puller. Remove the filler. Remove the equipĆ
ment in the plastic sheeting horizontally, and lay it down so that the side marked "Oben" faces upĆ
wards. Cut open the plastic sheet and remove the equipment.
Ed. 01.04 1-1

DVOR 432
General Information Operation and Maintenance
CAUTION
The packaging with the transmitter rack (Fig. 1-3) should always be laid down so that
the pallet (Fig. 1-3/4) is at the bottom. In addition arrows and inscriptions painted on the
crate indicate the side which must face upwards.
- Cut through the three plastic ribbons (Fig. 1-3/2) with scissors and remove. Lift off the telescope
box (Fig. 1-3/1), 2 people required. Remove the foam panel (Fig. 1-3/8). Lift the transmitter rack
(Fig. 1-3/6), 2 people required, and install in a vertical position.
WARNING
Hold the transmitter cabinet firmly in position until the support angles (Fig. 1-3/3 and 5)
have been dismantled. Pay special attention when removing the lower support angle.
- Undo the two screws (M10) left and right on the upper support angles (Fig. 1-3/5). Remove the
screws and washers and the upper support angles left and right. Tilt the transmitter cabinet (Fig.
1-3/6) forward slightly, hold it and dismantle the lower support angle (Fig. 1-3/3). Then carry the
transmitter cabinet to its point of installation and screw to the floor.
- Open the front door and remove the foam panel behind it.
- Close the front door.
Store away all despatch packaging (Fig. 1-3), so that it can be used again for transport purposes
if required. Use the original packaging components to repack. Repack the equipment and subassemĆ
blies as described above, but in reverse sequence.
ÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
3
1 Telescope box
5
ÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
ÄÄÄÄ ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÂÂÂ
2 Plastic ribbon
3 lower support angle
ÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
(ref. no. 36480 28009) 4
4 Pallet
5
6
7
upper support angle (2x)
(ref. no. 36385 28026)
Transmitter cabinet
Foam panel
Â
Fig. 1-3 Packaging for rail and road transport
1-2 Ed. 01.04

DVOR 432
1.2 STORING AND UNPACKING THE DVOR ANTENNAS
The 51 DVOR antenna domes (see Fig. 1-4) are supplied in 51 crates with dimensions approximately
750 x 750 x 750 [mm], weight approx. 30 kg each. No more than three crates should be stacked on
top of each other. No heavy objects should be placed on top of the crates (see Fig. 1-4). The antenna
bases, vertical pipes and decoupling modules are packed separately. The supply and installation of
the DVOR counterpoise is not discussed in this description.
Warning label for sticking on crate
2 wedge-shaped cushions
with reinforcement
Reinforcement
Pallet underneath
Position of central padding Labels

(in the center of 4 interior surfaces)
Dispatch boxes stacked to

provide room for 51 domes, no more
than 3 boxes stacked on top of each other
Fig. 1-4 Packaging for and transport of the DVOR antenna domes
Ed. 01.04 1-3

DVOR 432
1.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION INFORMATION

1.3.1 Safety Precautions
It is the task of the site supervisor or construction manager to make available the materials supplied
by Thales ATM, independently procured special materials and tools. For every site strict attention
should be paid to safety regulations issued by the local authorities.
1.3.1.1 General Rules
The following rules should be observed for prevention of accidents:
- Consumption of alcohol in any form is forbidden on the installation site.
- Drunken persons, or those under influence of alcohol will not be tolerated on the installation site.
- Protective goggles and safety gloves are to be worn when work is being carried out on batteries.
Rinsing water, soda and several cleaning cloths should be available.
- Sturdy shoes, safety gloves and safety helmets are to be worn. Safety belts with rescue line and
carbine swivel have to be used working on the counterpoise platform.
- Protruding nails, strips etc. must be removed immediately. Ladders and planks must always be
carefully checked before use.
- Do not tread on protruding plank sections.
- Never leave objects on scaffolding or ladders.
- Scaffolding or frames are to be erected sturdily and must always be tested before use.
- Test electrical devices and extension cables for accident safety.
- Remove fuses before carrying out work on mains circuits.
- Wear protective goggles when carrying out sanding or drilling operations.
- Sand off burr from chisels and punches in good time.
- Test striking tools for tightness of fit.
- Do not put pointed or sharp objects into working-clothing pockets.
- Jewelry such as chains and rings should be removed when working on building sites -
especially when working with electrical devices.
- Always keep escape routes clear.
- Every employee on an installation site should know:
S where the First-Aid box is kept
S the telephone number of the nearest casualty doctor and eye specialist
S where the fire extinguisher is kept
S the location of hazardous areas on the way to the work place, or at the work place itself.
1.3.1.2 Precautionary Measures against Damage caused by Animals
Damage caused by animals is highly improbable on account of the compactness of the installation
and the fact that the antenna is accommodated on the counterpoise at a height of several meters (3,
5, 7, 10 m). When the various cables have been pulled in, all outdoor conduit ends should be closed
off with a sealing compound to prevent the ingress of rodents and insects or the nesting of birds in
the plastic conduits provided on the lower side of the counterpoise to accommodate the sideband
antenna supply cables. The shelter door should be kept locked at all times in the absence of personĆ
nel.
1.3.1.3 Equipment Notes
Subassemblies should not be removed whilst under voltage. The consequence of this type of action
is the likelihood of permanent damage and the transmitter cabinet can not be set in operation corĆ
rectly. Never energize the installation with a non-grounded rack. The first electrical connection to be
made should be the rack ground. If there is no ground, the equipment central processing unit may
develop a fault or become blocked.
1-4 Ed. 01.04

DVOR 432
1.3.2 Personnel Requirement
At least 3 persons are required to install the shelter and antenna system. In addition to the crane driver,
two further persons are necessary to install the individual antennas (50 sideband antennas, 1 carrier
antenna), their mounting parts and the appropriate RF cabling on the counterpoise. It is however adĆ
visable to keep four persons ready for all installation work, so that a standby is available in case of
unforeseen events. If the antennas are lifted onto the counterpoise using improvised means and withĆ
out a crane truck (e.g. in the case of an installation height of 3 m), then four persons are absolutely
essential, and a fifth person would simplify operations.
1.3.3 Tools and Special Materials
The delivery list provided by Thales ATM should be checked at as early a date as possible in order
to identify materials not included in Thales ATM's scope of delivery which may be essential for the
infrastructure of the overall installation. For example, materials for grounding the DVOR installation
must be provided. Suggestions and instructions on correct grounding are contained in Chapter 2.
The following tools and equipment are the minimum required to unpack and assemble the equipment
and the antenna system (not including the DME or the TACAN):
1 crane truck, lifting capacity > 500 kg, min. jib reach 3 m, lifting height approx. 2 m above
the counterpoise.
1 Engineer's hammer 200 g, 1 engineer's hammer 1000 g
1 Crowbar (for opening crates)
1 Impact drill, min. power 600 W
1 Set fork spanners 6 to 32 mm
1 Set ring spanners 6 to 32 mm
1 Set of sockets 1/4" with ratchet
1 Set of sockets 1/2" with ratchet
1 Set screwdrivers, blade widths 3.5 to 8 mm
2 Phillips screwdriver
1 Offset screwdriver
1 Screwdriver with screw grip
1 Slide calipers
1 inch ruler, 1 tape measure 50 m,
1 Spirit level
1 Countersink
1 Cartridge injector
- Taps M3, M4, M5, M6 and M10 / with ratchet
- Sintered carbide drills 6 mm, 8 mm and 20 mm
- Various twist drills for metal
- Various flat and round files
300 Cable ties (UV-resistant), e.g. Panduit PLt 21-MO
200 Cable ties (UV-resistant), e.g. Panduit PLt 3S-MO
50 Cable ties (UV-resistant), e.g. Panduit PLt 5H-DO
1 Set cable markers
1 Cable fish tape
2 Protective goggles
1 Safety belt with rescue line and carbine swivel
1 First Aid box
3 (4) Safety helmets
The list does not include standard tools, such as cable stripping knives, various pliers, side cutting
pliers, metal cutters, chisels, center punches, or electrical instruments, such as continuity testers,
voltage testers or a digital multimeter.
NOTE: Tools and materials for installation of the counterpoise are not included in this listing.
Ed. 01.04 1-5

DVOR 432
1-6 Ed. 01.04

DVOR 432
1.4 LIST OF RECOMMENDED INSTRUMENTS AND ACCESSORIES
The following list contains recommendations for instruments, cables, attenuators, adapters and other
accessories, which may be used for installation, maintenance and trouble shooting of navigation
equipment, or at least will make the work easier. This equipment (or that with comparable characterisĆ
tics) is normally present at the site. If not, it can be supplied optionally by Thales ATM. A selection
of necessary equipment and accessories to be provided can be defined in consultation with Thales
ATM.
For the appropriate works, e.g. for startup, the necessary equipment is mentioned in the chapters
concerned.
Ed. 01.04 1-7

DVOR 432
1-8 Ed. 01.04

Navaids 400
ILS CVOR DVOR Marker

Designation Code No . Remarks/Type
Digital Voltmeter 97991 28217 x x x

Dual trace oscilloscope 97991 28454 TDS 360 x x x x
Thruline Wattmeter 97991 28040 0.45...2300 MHz x x x x
Monitor dipole, mobile 58317 24019 x
Dipole 60 cm 38826 28006 x
Mon. dipole add. parts mobile 83131 72409 x
Tripod 19614 72801 G5K, No. 1151 x
VOR-Monitor signal simulator 83134 31600 x
ILS/VOR signal analyzer 97991 28447 7010 portable x x
Attenuator 100 W/30 dB 49901 28051 50 Ohm / RBU100.8654.37 x
Probe 19983 15001 x
Measuring element 50 W 97991 28043 50 C, Bird, 100...250 MHz x x x

Measuring element 25 W 97991 28111 25 D, Bird, 200...500 MHz x
Measuring element 10 W 97980 28193 10 C, Bird, 100...250 MHz x x
Measuring element 5 W 97991 28112 5 D, Bird, 200...500 MHz x
Measuring element 1 W 97991 28192 095-1, Bird, 275...450 MHz x x x
Measuring element 1 W 97991 28193 275-1, Bird, 100...250 MHz x
Directional coupler 97991 28273 HP 778 D x x x

Terminatingresistor 97991 28274 HP 8491 A, 30 dB, opt. 30 x x x
Attenuator 100 W/30 dB 97499 28007 50 Ohm, BN 745395 x x x
3-dB-coupler 49901 23002 CH-132, M.SMA x x x
VHF-dummy load 1 W 24338 20401 50 Ohm, BN753790 x
Attenuator 20 dB/3,5 W 49901 20402 50 Ohm, BN654104 x x x
Attenuator 10 dB/1 W 49901 20405 50 Ohm, R414510 TNC x x x
Attenuator 6 dB/2.5 W 49901 20403 50 Ohm, R414506 TNC x x x
Attenuator 20 dB/1 W 49901 20406 50 Ohm, R414520 TNC x x x
Attenuator 10 dB/10 W 49901 28044 50 Ohm, BN745383 x -
Adapter 24334 20323 TNC male/fem. BN150419 x x x

Adapter 24334 20342 TNC male/male BN746700 x x x
Adapter 24334 20403 TNC fem./fem. BN746600 x x x
Adapter 24334 20404 BNC male/banana SHU06996 x x x
Adapter 24334 20408 BNC male/TNC fem. BN712100 x x x
Adapter 24334 20409 TNC male/N fem. BN725900 x x x
x = available (optional)
Ed. 01.04 1-9

Navaids 400
ILS CVOR DVOR Marker

Designation Code No Remarks/Type
Adapter 24334 20412 TNC fem./N male BN 725800 x x x

Adapter 24334 28017 SMA male/TNC fem. BN150907 x x x
Adapter 24334 28018 SMA fem./TNC male BN150908 x x x
RF-cable, 0,5 m 24029 28051 TNC male/male x x x

RF-cable, 2 m 24029 28052 TNC male/male x x x
RF-cable, 2 m 24029 28207 BNC male/male x x x
RF-cable, 55°/113MHz 27288 03859 TNC male/fem. x

RF-cable, 30 m 24029 28062 TNC male/male BN201961 x x
RF-cable, 0,08 m 24029 28185 TNC male/fem., 50 Ohm x x
RF-cable, 0,60 m 24029 28187 TNC male/fem., 50 Ohm x x x
RF-cable, 0,40 m 24029 28373 N male/TNC male, 50 Ohm x x x
RF-cable 27288 03856 SMA/TNC x
RF-cable 27288 03886 SMA-N RG400 x
AF-cable, 3 m 24029 28218 Banana pin/banana pin, shielded x x x
AF-cable 24039 28136 ∅ 2.52 , 300 mm yellow/green x
AF-cable 24039 28137 ∅ 2.52 , 520 mm yellow/green x
AF-cable 24039 28138 ∅ 2.52 , 520 mm blue x
AF-cable 24039 28139 ∅ 2.52 , 520 mm brown x
Coaxial adapter 97243 21318 BNC fem./TNC fem. BN712300 x x x

Coaxial adapter 97243 21319 BNC fem./TNC male BN712000 x x x
Coaxial adapter 97243 21320 BNC male/BNC male BN591700 x x x
Coaxial adapter 97243 21321 BNC fem./N male BN999400 x x x
Coaxial adapter 97243 21322 TNC fem./N fem. BN726000 x x x
Coaxial adapter 97243 21323 SMA fem./TNC fem. BN150906 x x x
Coaxial adapter 97243 21324 SMA fem./BNC fem. BN640802 x x x
Coaxial adapter 97243 21325 SMA male/BNC fem. BN640800 x x x
Others (Used for battery charging/maintenance):
Acid syringe with areometer

Acid jug
Funnel
Container (non-metallic) with distilled water
Cleaning agent (vaseline, soda, waste wool)
x = available (optional)
1-10 Ed. 01.04

DVOR 432
Operation and Maintenance Installation
CHAPTER 2
INSTALLATION
2.1 SELECTING THE INSTALLATION SITE
The area in which a DVOR is to be installed is determined by the responsible Civil Aviation Authority
according to the international air traffic regulations. This area is generally sufficiently large to allow
a point with the optimum topography and thus the optimum propagation conditions to be choosen.
This point is determined by means of a site survey at which a surveyor must always be present. ANS
can provide an engineering consultant on site for this survey. When the installation site has been deĆ
termined precise bearings must be taken, either with reference to trigonometrical points or - if a satelĆ
lite receiver is available - via satellite radio for increased precision.
Individual tree with height up to 12 m

Group of trees
Telephone lines
Buildings with metallic content 2,5°
Radial power lines up to 10 kV

2°
Shrubbery, wire fences up to 1.20 m Power lines <10 kV
Sheds, individual trees with heights 7 m if horizontal spread <10°
1,5°
1° Dense forest.
Buildings with metallic content
0,5°
Metallic buildings (hangars)
type h = 3 m
100 m
terrain slope 200 m
terrain slope
<2,3% terrain slope 300 m
<4%
<8%
terrain slope not specified
ÄÄÄÄ
TOP VIEW r100 m r200 m
ÄÄÄÄ
r300 m
ÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄ <7°
group of trees
h<10 m
h<12 m
vegetation below h<7 m

counterpoise height h<0.9 m forest
no metallic objects <10° wire fences h<8 m
h<1.8 m
metallic buildings
power lines h<5 m

radial
h<3.5...5.5 m
power lines h<10 m
Fig. 2-1 DVOR siting criteria (general data)
Ed. 01.04 2-1

DVOR 432
Installation Operation and Maintenance
2.2 FOUNDATIONS FOR DVOR COUNTERPOISE AND SHELTER
See Fig. 2-2, 2-3.
The following drawings show the foundations for counterpoises with heights of 3 m, 5 m, 7 m, 10 m
and the corresponding shelter foundations. The drawings are for information only.
- Shelter and ladder foundation drawing:
Shelter Ladder
2490 300
DVOR centre
250
opening for
450
power and
950
telephone cables
600
200 A A
400
1200
600
1040
2790
1200 foundation for
cable box
500
entrance side
175 * xxxx 500
250
175
550
foundation for ladder foundation

cable box A-A
150
275 650 275

250
0,00
200 200 0,00
950
950
800
250
804
soil top soil top
1200
1200x400
* NOTE:
Counterpoise height Distance xxxx [mm]
3m 2714.0
5m 2176.5
7m 1639.5
10 m 839.5
Fig. 2-2 Foundations for DVOR Shelter (for information only)
2-2 Ed. 01.04

DVOR 432
3225 5604 3225 3225 5604 3225
DVOR-counterpoise; foundation drawing

(for information only)
3235
15° 15°
1747 30° 3026 1747 1747 3026 1747
30°
5604
1747
30°
30°
3026
∅13500
250
300 2490
3235
15°
1747
15°
450
950
cable input
power/tel
600 600
250
1200
2790
1040
400
1747
cable box
foundation 1200
15° 15°
ladder
500
3235
250
foundation
500 * xxxx 175

2490 175
3026
30°
30°
∅25000
1747
5604
30° 30°
15° 15°
3235
not to scale
all dimensions in mm
* xxxx= distance depends on counterpoise height
Fig. 2-3 Foundations for DVOR counterpoise and shelter (for information only)
Ed. 01.04 2-3

DVOR 432
2.3 DVOR CONTAINER SHELTER
2.3.1 General
See Fig. 2-4.
The Navaids equipment can be supplied already installed in a 10 ft Standard Shelter (type 1D) which
is offered by Thales ATM. To cover the requirements the shelter is based on the definition on transport
containers ISO/DIN standards. The shelter consists of a self-supporting, distortion resistant steel
frame construction with eight ISO corners and walls made of sandwich panels in standardized conĆ
tainer dimensions.
During installation, the shelter should be placed on the foundations such that the door is oriented
according to the site survey and project drawings. The shelter is anchored to the four foundation
blocks using the ISO corners and twist locks. The power supply (mains) and signal (RC, field monitor)
feeder cables enter from below through openings in the shelter floor.
Support for A/C

2438
Lead through used

for DVOR antenna
connections
2991 2438
(Dimensions in mm; Tare weight approx. 900 kg)
Fig. 2-4 10 ft DVOR container shelter
2.3.2 Transportation and Installation of the Container Shelter

See Fig. 2-5.
When transporting by crane or helicopter, care should be taken to ensure that the angle between the
lifting harness and the crate is at least 60°.
min. 60°
Fig. 2-5 Correct lifting with a lifting harness
Ed. 01.04 2-5

DVOR 432
10 ft Container Shelter
Air Conditioner (option)
ÂÂ
Concrete foundation
Lead through used

for DVOR antenna Location of Navaids 400 cabinets
connections
Ventilation of battery box (DVOR, ASU, DME)
Battery Box
Wiring Diagram of electrical Installation
option box Main Distribution Panel

Main Fuse
switch
L1 *
L2
L3
Residual
Current Breaker
N 40
a I>
0.03
FI1
B2A
B10A B18A C20A C20A C20A C20A
B10A
B10A
PE F4 F3 F1 F2 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9
change o.
Overvoltage
Protection
4 3 1
Spare 2 5 6 7 8 9 10
optional
..
optional
BCPS θ junction box

....
NAV
+ 48 V
- set to
.... ASU TX A/C1 A/C2 36 °C
heater
.... Temp.
Earth Collector Bar
BCPS DME
TX Rack Sensor
DME Inside Light Socket outlets Air-Conditioner
etc. - + Single Phase "Option"
48 V
F2 (G0.2A)
F1 (K50A)
20 protected wires
DME
Station Ground
- if available
-
+
twilight obstruction light
Signal lines 90 V/Type F
Emergency battery switch antenna
NF 600 OHM 48 V
Line Terminal Box
* Example diagram for Mains Supply with 3 Phases, N and PE
Fig. 2-6 Standard shelter, ground plan and electrical installation DVOR (example)
2-6 Ed. 01.04

DVOR 432
2.4 INSTALLATION OF THE DVOR ANTENNAS
2.4.1 General
This chapter describes the installation and adjustment of the DVOR antennas. The installation of the
counterpoise with associated supports and framework, and the framework decking are normally part
of the civil works section and not included in this description. The counterpoise foundation drawing
in section 2.2 is shown for information only.
WARNING
Sturdy shoes, safety gloves and safety helmets must be worn during installation. Safety
belts with rescue line and swivel snaphook should be used when working on the counterĆ
poise platform.
2.4.1.1 Prerequisites
- Counterpoise
The counterpoise for the DVOR antenna has been completely assembled according to the drawĆ
ings set included with the counterpoise material.
- Support for carrier antenna (counterpoise center)
The support for mounting the middle antenna has been installed in the center of the counterpoise.
Permissible deviation from the center: ±150 mm.
- Antenna ring (Fig. 2-7)
The antenna ring has been installed on the counterpoise. The radius measured at the inner ring
is 6623 mm.
- Cable run (Fig. 2-8)
16 plastic or steel pipes have been installed on the lower side of the counterpoise for the cable runs
from the sideband antennas to the center of the counterpoise. A further pipe is used in addition
if the antenna of a collocated DME is to be installed.
r = 6623
2
1 Outer ring
2 Inner ring
Fig. 2-7 Antenna ring
Ed. 01.04 2-7

DVOR 432
pipes, radially arranged
U-girder
Fig. 2-8 Pipes for guiding the antenna cables
2.4.2 Antenna mounting

See Figs. 2-9 to 2-13.
2.4.2.1 Lifting the Antennas onto the Counterpoise
The DVOR antennas comprising antenna dome, decoupling module and vertical pipe (installed) are
lifted with their packaging over the outer edge and onto the counterpoise. To do this the use of a lifting
crane, a trestle with swiveling arm or, e.g. in the case of the 3 m high counterpoise, a guyed auxiliary
mast is recommended (Fig. 2-9).
2.4.2.2 Installation of the Carrier Antenna

Determine the center of the counterpoise with respect to the antenna ring of the sideband antennas.
Install the vertical pipe of the carrier antenna at this point, then align it using a spirit level (compensate
if necessary by means of washers, etc.) and secure. Mount the carrier antenna with cover on the vertiĆ
cal pipe and secure with the appropriate screws.
CAUTION
When removing the cover, always make sure that no rain can penetrate the lower section
of the antenna or come into contact with the antenna elements.
Trestle with swiveling arm (3 m, 5 m, 7 m, 10 m counterpoise) Gyed auxiliary mast (3 m counterpoise)
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
Fig. 2-9 Lifting equipment for DVOR antenna installation
2-8 Ed. 01.04

DVOR 432
2.4.2.3 Installation of the Sideband Antennas
First install antenna 1. The installation point of this antenna should be selected with the aid of a comĆ
pass such that it is aligned approximately with North with respect to the middle antenna (Fig. 2-10).
Mark the installation point on the antenna ring. Install vertical pipe 1 here, and align it perpendicularly
with the aid of a spirit level (if necessary compensate by means of washers or similar). The vertical
pipe should be installed such that the installation hole for the decoupling module is on the left as seen
from the middle antenna. Secure the vertical pipe to the antenna ring by means of a clamping plate
and 2 screws (Fig. 2-11). Secure all vertical pipe fastenings to the outer ring (Fig. 2-10).
North
2 1 50
4 3
5
6
Antenna ring
outer ring
51
vertical pipes Antenna ring
Fig. 2-10 Installation of vertical pipes and installation point of antenna 1
1 2
6
1 Holes for measurement probe
2 Antenna dome
3 Antenna ring
4 Position of middle antenna
5 Installation hole in vertical pipe
6 Clamping plate 4 7
7 Screws
Fig. 2-11 Installation direction of vertical pipe and antenna dome
Ed. 01.04 2-9

DVOR 432
Install antenna 2 in the same way as antenna 1 and to the left of it (as seen from the middle antenna),
such that with a vertical pipe diameter of 127 mm the distance between the outer edge of pipe 1 and
the outer edge of pipe 2 is 720 mm (Fig. 2-12). This distance can be set anticlockwise from antenna
to antenna using improved means (e.g. a wooden rod cut to size ).
NOTE: 720 mm is a standard dimension, which may vary somewhat in practice on account of
tolerance chains within the antenna ring and the vertical pipes. In such cases a positive
or negative deviation from the standard dimension of 720 mm will be measured between
antenna 50 and antenna 1. This dimension (deviation from 720 mm) should be divided
by 50, in order to calculate a new clearance. The vertical pipes are then readjusted with
a new wooden rod in a second procedure. Each vertical pipe adjusted must also be
aligned precisely using a spirit level.
The hooks (Fig. 2-13/5) on both sides of the antenna ring holding a layer of structural steel matting
should be adjusted as necessary in order to ensure that they are firmly secured. The hooks ensure
adequate electrical connection.
1 2 3
1 Vertical pipe of antenna 2

2 Wooden rod
3 Vertical pipe of antenna 1
720 mm
Fig. 2-12 Spacing of vertical pipes of sideband antenna
Careful, precise mechanical alignment of the antenna will considerably simplify the work of the comĆ
missioning engineer. A maximum deviation of 3 mm between antenna 50 and antenna 1 with respect
to the corrected standard dimension can be tolerated. A sideband antenna (with cover) should now
be mounted on each vertical pipe. At first, the lower section of the antenna domes should only be
fastened loosely to the vertical pipe using the 3 screws and the oblong holes (Fig. 2-13/6).
1 Antenna dome
2 Outer ring
3 Inner ring
4 Vertical pipe
5 Hook
6 Screws (3x)
5 4 3 2
Fig. 2-13 Antenna ring, single antenna and vertical pipe
2-10 Ed. 01.04

DVOR 432
2.4.3 RF Cabling of Antennas
See Figs. 2-14 to 2-17.
2.4.3.1 General
The RF cables between the antennas and the opening in the shelter wall are marked from 1 to 51 at
both ends by means of cable markers.
CAUTION
Make sure that no bend in an RF-cable is made with a radius of less than 50mm.
2.4.3.2 Carrier Antenna
Slide the RF cable (51) through the vertical pipe from below, connect the coaxial connector to the
antenna connection socket and secure with the union nut. Feed the other end of the cable through
the cable duct and the U-girder (Figs. 2-8, 2-17) from the counterpoise to the shelter via the cable
box. Provide strain relief for the cable underneath the vertical pipe by means of UV-resistant cable
ties.
2.4.3.3 Sideband Antennas
Option: The antennas should be interconnected with RF cables as follows: Antenna 1 to 3, antenna
3 to 5, 2 to 4, 4 to 6, etc. (see Fig. 2-14). The RF cables should be pulled out through the installation
hole into the vertical pipe, and connected to the coaxial connections on the side of the decoupling
module (Fig. 2-15). Check that these screwed connections are secure. Not used with matcher.
A50 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 Matcher Antenna A2
Module
X2
X1
*** ***
*** ***
from ASU
Antenna A2
ASU X2
Option: X4 X3
ASM-D ASM-D ASM-D ASM-D Decoupling X1
(1) (5) (6) (10) Module
** Optional connectors if coupling between antennas 1 to 50 is used Antenna Antenna
*** Coupling cables (optional); these cables are ommitted using the matcher module A50** from ASU A4**
Fig. 2-14 Connection diagram of individual radiators of the sideband antennas

Option: Matcher
Decoupling module Ref.No. 83134 00103
with side connectors
Ref.No. 83134 00101 1
8
6 7 2
3
1 Output Matcher/Decoupling Module to antenna
7
2 Srews (3x)
(Antenna dome, lower section/vertical pipe)
3 Supply cable to/from antenna 4 optional 4
4 Supply cable for antenna 2 from ASU
6 5
5 Vertical pipe
6 Supply cable to/from antenna 50, optional
7 Matcher/Decoupling Module
8 Trimmer C5
Fig. 2-15 Sideband antenna with matcher/decoupling module pulled out (e.g.: antenna 2)
Ed. 01.04 2-11

DVOR 432
The supply cables should be fed through the pipes mounted below the counterpoise to the center,
and from there via the U-girder and the cable box to the shelter (Fig. 2-8, 2-17). Excessive lengths
of cable are cleared in a cable box at the lower end of the U-girder. Up to 4 supply cables can be
combined and fed through a single pipe. The RF cabling of the individual sideband antennas to the
shelter should be installed such that, for example, the cable from the central connection of the matchĆ
er/decoupling module (Fig. 2-15) of antenna 2 is fed to terminal 2 of the coaxial wall entrance of the
shelter. When the cables are connected, the matcher/decoupling module is screwed to the antenna
terminal via the long installation hole in the vertical pipe (Fig. 2-16). When the screw connections
have been made, the installation hole in the vertical pipe should be closed by raising the cover. Relieve
the cables underneath the vertical pipe using UV-resistant cable ties. When the cables have been
pulled through the pipes below the counterpoise, their ends should be sealed using the packaging
material for the antenna sections, otherwise birds may attempt to nest in the pipes.
The supply cables at the shelter should be laid such that they form a sufficiently large loop to prevent
any rainwater running down the cables and coming into contact with the coaxial screw connections
ÉÉ ÉÉ
in the wall entrance. The cable loops should be protected by means of a suitable cover.
É É
1a
ÉÉ ÉÉ 1
1a
É É 2
ÉÉ ÉÉ
1 Matcher/Decoupling-Module
ÉÉ ÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
6
1a Side connectors, decoupling module only
3 4
2 Vertical pipe
3 Stuctural steel matting
4 Pipe
5 Cable tie, UV-resistant
6 Coupling cables, used with decoupling module only 5
Fig. 2-16 Cabling of sideband antenna
Counterpoise RF cable pipe Cable pipe support RF cable Shelter
cover
U-girder
Ladder
RF cable box
RF cables
DVOR center
Earth's surface
Ladder foundation Cable box foundation Shelter foundation
Fig. 2-17 Cabling to the shelter
2-12 Ed. 01.04

DVOR 432
2.4.4 Preliminary Settings and mechanical Alignment of the Sideband
Antennas
See Figs. 2-18 to 2-20.
CAUTION
Care should be taken when removing the covers from the carrier and sideband antennas
to ensure that no rain can penetrate into the lower section of the antenna or come into
contact with the antenna elements.
Remove the cover from the carrier antenna (middle antenna), secured by with of 8 self-tapping, stainĆ
less steel round-head screws 3 x 32 mm. Take the rectangular tube and pin from the installation acĆ
cessories for the DVOR system (Code No. 83095 90087), and install them at the center of the carrier
antenna. The pin can be used to take bearings when aligning the 50 sideband antennas.
Remove the cover from one of the sideband antennas (e.g. antenna 1). Preset the two calibration caĆ
pacitors (Fig. 2-18) of each antenna, each with 2 plates adjustable by means of a threaded shaft and
fastened by means of a lock nut. The plates should be roughly symmetrical between the antenna eleĆ
ments and spaced as shown in Fig. 2-19 (for 113 MHz, e.g. 6.7 mm). This spacing is easy to set if
a suitable twist drill shaft is used as a gauge. The lock nuts should be tightened following the setting.
Loosen the 3 mounting bolts for the antenna lower section/vertical pipe, and move the lower section
of the antenna slightly to the left and right on the vertical pipe in accordance with the oblong holes
in the vertical pipe. Using the rectangular tube (Fig. 2-20), align the various sideband antennas from
the outside of the installation ring via the pointer sights (press-fitted at the top of the antenna lower
section) to the pin (bearing marker), which is mounted on the center of the middle antenna. The 3
screws (for securing the antenna lower section to the vertical pipe) should be tightened following the
setting. Bearings should be taken with respect to the middle antenna several times if necessary, and
the adjustment repeated. When the lower section of the antenna has been secured to the vertical pipe
the cover should be installed. The 8 self-tapping screws for securing the cover should only be
screwed in roughly half way, since further calibrations are likely to be necessary during commissionĆ
ing.
Following these operations, or in the event that they are not necessary, secure the cover by means
of the 8 screws. If damage is determined in the coated polystyrene body of the lower section of the
antenna, it should be repaired immediately using the repair kit (Code No. 83095 90086).
Lock nuts Antenna dome
Adjustable
capacitor
CA
CA
ÍÍ
Antenna element Spacing a
ÍÍ Suitable twist drill shaft

(e.g. 6.7 mm for 113 MHz)
Fig. 2-18 Calibration capacitors on the antenna elements
Ed. 01.04 2-13

DVOR 432
CA
[mm]
14
13
12
11
CA
10 frame
0
108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 MHz
Fig. 2-19 Plate separation distance of capacitors CA as a function of the operating frequency
Bearing marker (pin)
Clamping screws
Sideband antenna Carrier antenna (middle antenna)
Bearing marker Bearing marker

(rear sight) (front sight)
Fig. 2-20 Aligning the sideband antenna with the aid of bearing markers
2-14 Ed. 01.04

DVOR 432
2.4.5 Installation of the Monitor Dipole
See Figs. 2-21, 2-22.
The monitor dipole is mounted on a mast at a height of 1.3 m above the antenna counterpoise. It
should be installed at a distance of 180 ... 200 m from the center of the counterpoise. It is generally
installed at magnetic north. The supply cable is fed via a cable trench to the DVOR housing.
Monitor dipole Counterpoise with antennas

1.3 m
Mast
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
Cable trench
Foundation
180 ... 200 m
30 m
Fig. 2-21 Diagrammatic site layout of DVOR monitor dipole
Dipole
Mast
Mast mounting on foundation
Fig. 2-22 Mast with monitor dipole (example)
Ed. 01.04 2-15

DVOR 432
2.4.6 Conversion of S3000 Antennas to S4000/NAV400 Antennas
Dismantle the 39 sideband antennas and the carrier antenna in the center of the S3000 installation
with associated vertical pipes from the installation ring or from the location in the center of the counterĆ
poise. These antennas and the associated cabling can be dismantled in 4 to 5 hours with the aid of
6 other persons, providing the dismantled parts are to be scrapped. If the antennas are destined for
further use, the work will accordingly take longer on account of the necessary care.
Install the vertical pipe of the new carrier antenna in the position of the old pipe, and secure. The instalĆ
lation positions of the 50 sideband antennas should be selected as described in Section 2.4.2.3. SecĆ
tions 2.4.2.1 "Lifting the Antennas onto the Counterpoise", 2.4.3 "RF cabling of the Antennas" and
2.4.4 "Preliminary Settings and mechanical Alignment of the Sideband Antennas" should also be paid
attention to.
2-16 Ed. 01.04

DVOR 432
2.5 INSTALLATION AT THE RACK IN THE SHELTER
2.5.1 General
This chapter describes the connections at the transmitter and ASU rack: power supply, RF connecĆ
tions, interface connections and connection of a Remote Control (RMMC).
NOTE: For the Thales ATM shelter delivered with the navaids system all fuses are preinstalled.
If the shelter is provided by the customer, he will be responsible for the installation includĆ
ing a mains fuse box with arrester and a battery fuse box. Following fuse protection is
recommended: external mains fuse for transmitter cabinet F= C20A, for battery fuse
F1= K50A (power) and F2= G0.2A (sensor lines), regard also Fig. 2-6.
For a mains voltage of 115 VAC the standard mains wiring concept allows up to 3 ACC
modules. For a 115 VAC supply with 4 modules provided, standard mains wiring has to
be adapted concerning diameter of supply cables, size of mains terminals and mains filter.
2.5.2 Power Supply

2.5.2.1 Power Connections
See Fig. 2-23, 2-24.
The BCPS modules are located in the ASU (100 W version) or in the transmitter cabinet (50 W version).
The terminal blocks for electrical and signal connections as listed below are installed on the BCPS
connection plate and the C-bar, which are located at the lower back side of the ASU or transmitter
cabinet, or on the ASU or transmitter cabinet bottom plate. They are accessible after opening the rear
door of the rack. The connections at the transmitter cabinet in the 100 W version are made to the C-
bar at the lower back side.
ASU cabinet, rear (100 W version only) or DVOR cabinet, rear (50 W version only):
BCPS connection plate:
- 6 mains terminals L1, L2, L3, N, PE (Protective Earth) and FPE (Functional Protective Earth)
- 1 Speedy connector 26-pin for control signals to/from the BCPS from TX
- 2 single terminal blocks for battery (+ and -), factory wired
- 2 single terminal blocks for NAV equipment, factory wired
- 5 terminals for measuring lines to the battery, factory wired
C-bar:
- 2 single terminal blocks for connecting the battery (+B,-B)
- 5 terminals (2,1, F, F, 0) for measuring lines to the battery BAT2, BAT1, 2 BFUSE and BAT0
- 1 terminal block (+A,-A) for connecting the ASU power supply
- 4 terminals (+D,-D; +R,-R) for connecting collocated DME and Radio Link (RL) equipment
- 1 single terminal block (+N,-N) for connecting the NAV equipment, factory wired
Bottom plate:
- 5 mains terminals L1, L2, L3, N, PE
- mains filter with mains terminals 4 In/4 Out/1 PE (European version only)
DVOR cabinet, rear (100 W version only):
C-bar:
- 1 terminal block (+N,-N) for connecting the NAV equipment, factory wired
- 1 terminal block (+A,-A) for connecting the ASU power supply
Ed. 01.04 2-17

DVOR 432
NOTE: The BCPS is a unit designed for "stationary operation", and its main connection and
protection measures should conform to VDE 0875, Table 2, Paras. 6 and 7. The unit fulfils
the protection class I of EN 60950. The following should be noted in particular:
S A permanently wired mains connection is recommended. The 230 VAC supply system
must be able to supply approx. 110 V in minimum, with an internal resistance of the
supply system < 0.5 ohms.
S If the wiring is not permanent, the plug-in connection must be protected against incorĆ
rect connection (e.g. Perilex or CEE connectors).
S The ground cable must be laid separately, and connected permanently to the FPE terĆ
minal and to the connecting bolt (BSE) of the rack.
S A ground fault interrupter must be provided for a rated fault current of 30 mA.
The power supply is located in the ASU rack. The connection must be done in the following sequence:
WARNING
Before connecting the cables check that the mains lead is dead and that the battery is
not connected.
- Set the ON/OFF switches of the ACC 54 units to OFF. Remove the units.
- Remove the rear panel.
- Connect a cable between the terminal FPE and the potential equalization bus.
- Connect the mains leads (nom. 115 to 230 VAC/50 Hz, single phase) to the terminals designated
L3, N and PE located on the bottom plate and from there to the corresponding terminals on the
BCPS connection plate. If a mains filter is installed on the bottom plate (European version only)
connect the mains leads to the corresponding terminals on the mains filter and from there to the
terminals on the BCPS connection plate. The protective earth should be connected to PE.
- Connect the cables to the battery terminals BAT+ and BAT- located on the C-bar taking care
not to connect them the wrong way round.
- Connect the measurement lines to the battery terminals BAT0, BAT1, BAT2 and BFUSE (2x) loĆ
cated on the C-bar if an auxiliary contact is available on the battery main switch.
- Connect the ground bolt (BSE) of the rack (Fig. 2-28) to the ground points and/or the potential
equalization bus of the shelter.
2-18 Ed. 01.04

DVOR 432
2.5.2.2 Connection of Battery Set
See Fig. 2-23, 2-24 and 2-29.
CAUTION
When connecting the DC supply observe the correct polarity (+ and -).
The battery set is connected via two pvc-insulated copper cables as per DIN 57281 with a cross-
sectional area of 16 mm2. The length of this connection is restricted to a maximum of 10 m for electrical
reasons.
Connect the leads to the terminals BAT (+) and BAT (-) on the C-bar. In order to protect the battery,
the positive line must have a 50 A fuse, if the battery monitoring program is used, and an automatic
overcurrent device (50 ADC) with signalling contact. Connect the signalling contacts to the terminals
BFUSE of the measuring line connector. Install the following cables for measuring purposes:
- from battery plus-pole via terminals of fuse switch F2 (in fuse box) to terminal BAT2 of measuring
line connector
- from the middle of the battery set via terminals of fuse switch F2 (in fuse box) to terminal BAT1 of
the measuring line connector
- from battery minus-pole via terminals of fuse switch F2 (in fuse box) to terminal BAT0 of the meaĆ
suring line connector
- Connect cable W109 (BCPS control) from BCPS to connector X74 on BP-C, rear of transmitter
rack.
Ed. 01.04 2-19

DVOR 432
battery terminal measuring line ASU power DME RL transmitter rack C-bar mains terminal
connector terminal terminal terminal terminal
to ASU Signboard
ASU cabinet
rear BAT BAT
Speedy
+B-B 2 1 F F0
+A -A +D -D +R -R +N -N
N L1 L2 L3 PE FPE
+
BAT BAT
NAV NAV
+
-
-
L2 L2
ÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
PE
L1 L1
cabinet
N
PE
bottom plate with L3 L3
L2 L1
cable glands N N
L3
mains terminal mains filter

(european version only)
BCPS control line
5
fuse box mains

F1 BP-C
2 4 23
BFUSE connection
50 A DC
BFUSE
box
1 3 24 shelter X74
230 VAC
BAT2 0.2 A F2
BAT1
BAT0 rear side of transmitter rack
48 V
PMM
+ -
TX2 TX1 NAV
emergency battery battery box

bus bar
Signboard 48VP2* DC/DC
-Battery
+Battery
BFUSE
BFUSE
UBAT2
UBAT1
UBAT0
+DME
-DME
+NAV
-NAV
GND
+RL
-RL
+D
-D
+N
-N
+R
-R
+B
2
1
F
F
0
-B
bottom plate NAV NAVNAV ASU ASU

with
cable glands C-bar
mains filter connectors position: +N -N +A -A
L2 L3 L3 L2
PE
L1 N N L1 NAV+ NAV- ASU+
IN OUT
factory wired
* Exist, if TX1 or TX2 On
Fig. 2-23 Connections at the BCPS connection plate, C-bar and bottom plate (100 W version)
2-20 Ed. 01.04

DVOR 432
FPE
BP-BCPS shelter ground BP-C
PE
PE PE
Mains
N N
L3 L3
mains
L2 filter L2
L1 L1
bottom plate
Speedy 26pin, male X74
BCPS
12 12 BCPS-OFF BCPS ON/OFF
1 1 "L" = ON
GND (HC-level
3 3 BBCPS1
Modules
7 7 BBCPS2
Flat ribbon cable Status-report
11 11 Modul defective
BBCPS3 = "L"-(HC-level)
15 15 BBCPS4
5,19 5,19
5,19 GND
14
W58 W122 14 NAV-
16 16 NAV+
18 18 IBAT-
20 Current measurement
20 IBAT+
9 9 UBAT-
22 22 UBAT1+
13 13 Voltage measurement
UBAT-
24 24 UBAT2+
19 19 OPTO_GND
Opto in
17 17 BFUSE (in_opto+24) BFUSE
RL + S3 PMM
RL -
DME + S1
DME -
S2
+54 V +NAV
2mOhm F2 F1
Iload 0V -NAV
ASU+ K1
ASU+
ASU- X1
+BAT F1
+BAT X83
(to CSL)
50 A DC
BFUSE
BFUSE BP-DC
GND TX1
MON
TX2 BP-T
0.2 A F2 LRCI BP-C
BAT2 CSL
+
ASU
48 V
BAT1
BAT0
-
C bar
C bar
Ibat -BAT
2mOhm Fuse box

Shelter
ASU Cabinet Battery room Transmitter Cabinet
Fig. 2-24 Cabling, BCPS connection plate, C-bar and bottom plate (100 W version)
Ed. 01.04 2-21

DVOR 432
2.5.3 Connections at Transmitter and ASU Rack

See Fig. 2-25, 2-29.
2.5.3.1 RF/AF Connections
Make the following cable connections inside the shelter:
Transmitter Rack Cable No. ASU Rack
SB1 W53 SB1
SB2 W54 SB2
CSB W52 CSB IN
ASU W57 ASU Control
BCPS W58 BCPS Bite
Transmitter Rack Cable No. Z1 (divider) Cable No. Shelter
MON1 W81 Out1
MON2 W82 Out2
In W56 Connecting Plate
Transmitter rack
(D)VOR (D)VOR
SB1
LGM1 Local PC ASU DIAGNOSIS DME-IDENT
CSB
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
LGM2/DME LGM3/NDB VAM ANALOG OIO LCP IN OIO LCP OUT
MON1
DVOR
CVOR
MON2
MON4
MON3
MON3
MON4
MON2
MON5
MON1
MON6
DVOR
CVOR
MON7 MON8
SB2
BCPS
Nextfield 1 Nextfield 2 )* Field dipole 1
rear side
)* Field dipole 2 or Nextfield 3
ASU rack sheet cover (CE version only)
ASU Control
SB1
SB2
ËËËËËËËËËËËËËËËËË
CSB OUT
CSB IN
42 44 46 48 50 32 34 36 38 40 22 24 26 28 30 12 14 16 18 20 02 04 06 08 10 41 43 45 47 49 31 33 35 37 39 21 23 25 27 29 11 13 15 17 19 01 03 05 07 09
BCPS-Bite
rear side
Fig. 2-25 DVOR transmitter and ASU rack, top view, connectors
2-22 Ed. 01.04

DVOR 432
2.5.3.2 Pin-Assignment ASU Interface Connector (intern, SubD, 37pin, female)
See Fig. 2-25.

PIN ASSIGNMENT PIN ASSIGNMENT PIN ASSIGNMENT
1 Gnd 14 Gnd 27 P9b0
2 P9a1 15 ADVOR 28 P9b2
3 P9a3 16 Gnd 29 P9b4
4 P9a5 17 MO10KHZ 30 P9b6
5 P9a7 18 Gnd 31 P9c4
6 P9c1 19 ASU MVD On 32 P9c6
7 P9c3 20 Gnd 33 T30HZ
8 P9b1 21 P9a0 34 -
9 P9b3 22 P9a2 35 ME10KHZ
10 P9b5 23 P9a4 36 5KV
11 P9b7 24 P9a6 37 BASU
12 P9c5 25 P9c0
13 P9c7 26 P9c2
2.5.3.3 Connection ASU to Antennas
See Fig. 2-26, 2-29.

Make the following cable connections:
ASU Rack Cable No Cable through of Shelter
RF W51 Carrier antenna ANT51
RF W1-W50 Sideband antennas ANT1-ANT50
9 19 29 39 49 10 20 30 40 50
7 17 27 37 47 8 18 28 38 48
5 15 25 35 45 6 16 26 36 46
5
3 13 23 33 43 4 14 24 34 44
A
1 11 21 31 41 2 12 22 32 42
66 67 68 69 70 76 77 78 79 80
6
61 62 63 64 65 71 72 73 74 75
65 70 75 80 55 56
6
64 69 74 79
63 68 73 78
53 1
1 SB1 from DVOR transmitter rack B 62 67 72 77
2 SB2 from DVOR transmitter rack 55 56
3 CSB from DVOR transmitter rack
61 66 71 76 54 2
58 59
4 RF to carrier antenna A51 52 3
57 59 57 60 58 60
5 RF to sideband antennas A1 to A50 51 4
6 ASU intern connection between Subrack A- B
NOTE: Numbers (e.g. "51") are assigned to W51 6
Fig. 2-26 DVOR ASU rack, front side, connections
Ed. 01.04 2-23

DVOR 432
2-24 Ed. 01.04

DVOR 432
2.5.4 External Interface Connection
See Fig. 2-25, 2-28.

The following connectors are available on the top and front of the transmitter cabinet:
- DME-IDENT analog DME interface
- DIAGNOSIS communication interface diagnostics
- LGM1 dedicated line connection (to RMMC) with use of LGM 1200MD or
PTT connection (optional) or serial communication interface
- LGM2/DME PTT connection (LGM 28.8) or serial communication interface DME
- LGM3/NDB PTT connection (LGM 28.8) or serial communication interface NDB
- ANALOG measurement purposes
- Local PC local operation with ADRACS
- VAM optional voice or ATIS connection, e.g. from tower
- OIO LCP IN spare in, optocoupler
- OIO LCP OUT spare out, optocoupler
2.5.4.1 DME IDENT
SubD, 37pin, male, from connector X85 BP-CD. Refer to section 2.7.
2.5.4.2 DIAGNOSIS
SubD, 9pin, male, from connector X86 BP-CD

PIN ASSIGNMENT PIN ASSIGNMENT
1 DCD 6 DSR
2 RXD 7 RTS
3 TXD 8 CTS
4 DTR 9 RI
5 GND
2.5.4.3 LGM1
SubD, 9pin, male, from connector X92 or X97 BP-CE; X92 = LGM modem output
1 La 6 E
2 Lb 7 not used
3 A2 8 not used
4 B2 9 not used
5 GND
X97 = TTL (direct)
1 DCD 6 DSR
2 RXD 7 RTS
3 TXD 8 CTS
4 DTR 9 RI
5 GND
Ed. 01.04 2-25

DVOR 432
2.5.4.4 LGM2/DME
SubD, 9pin, male, from connector X93 or X98 BP-CE; X93 = LGM modem output
1 La 6 DSR
2 Lb 7 RTS
3 A2 8 CTS
4 B2 9 RI
5 GND
X98 = TTL/RS232 (direct)
1 DCD 6 DSR
2 RXD 7 RTS
3 TXD 8 CTS
4 DTR 9 RI
5 GND
X98 = RS422 (direct)
1 TXD+ 6 RXD+
2 TXD- 7 RXD-
3 not used 8 not used
5 not used
2.5.4.5 LGM3/NDB
SubD, 9pin, female, from connector X94 or X99 BP-CE; X94 = LGM modem output
1 La 6 DSR
2 Lb 7 RTS
3 A2 8 CTS
4 B2 9 RI
5 GND
X99 = TTL/RS232 (direct)
1 DCD 6 DSR
2 RXD 7 RTS
3 TXD 8 CTS
4 DTR 9 RI
5 GND
X99 = RS422 (direct)
1 TXD+ 6 RXD+
2 TXD- 7 RXD-
5 not used
2-26 Ed. 01.04

DVOR 432
2.5.4.6 ANALOG
SubD, 9pin, female, from connector X84 BP-CD

1 ANALOG-IN1 6 ANALOG-IN2
4 15 VN-A (-15 V) 9 15 VP-A (+15 V)
5 AGND
2.5.4.7 Local PC
SubD, 9pin, male, from connector X4 of LCP

1 DCD 6 DSR
2 RXD 7 RTS
3 TXD 8 CTS
4 DTR 9 RI
5 GND
2.5.4.8 VAM
SubD, 9pin, female, from connector X95 BP-CE

1 LV1 6 LVG
2 LV2 7
3 SYNCH 8
4 SYNCR 9
5 GND
2.5.4.9 OIO LCP IN
SubD, 25pin, male, to connector X2 of LCP via X82 BP-C
1 GND 14 VCC (+5 V)
2 TTLOUT3 (internal use) 15 IAUX0
3 IAUX1 16 IAUX2
4 IAUX3 17 IAUX4
5 IAUX5 18 IAUX6
6 IAUX7 19 IAUX8
7 IAUX9 20 IAUX10
8 IAUX11 21 IAUX12
9 IAUX13 22 IAUX14
10 IAUX15 23 TTLIN0 (internal use)
11 TTLIN1 (internal use) 24 TTLIN2 (internal use)
12 TTLOUT4 (internal use) 25 TTLIN3 (internal use)
13 GND
Ed. 01.04 2-27

DVOR 432
2.5.4.10 OIO LCP OUT
SubD, 25pin, female, from connector X2 of LCP via X82 BP-C

1 COM3 (common connect 3) 14 COM4 (common connect 4)
2 TTLOUT2 (internal use) 15 OAUX0
3 OAUX1 16 OAUX2
4 OAUX3 17 OAUX4
5 OAUX5 18 OAUX6
6 OAUX7 19 COM1 (common connect 1)
7 OAUX8 20 OAUX9
8 OAUX10 21 OAUX11
9 OAUX12 22 OAUX13
10 OAUX14 23 OAUX15
11 COM2 (common connect 2) 24 TTLOUT0 (internal use)
12 TTLOUT1 (internal use) 25 VCC (+5 V)
13 GND
2-28 Ed. 01.04

DVOR 432
2.5.5 External Interfaces, Cable Connections
2.5.5.1 Connection of Remote Control RMMC
- Dedicated line modem LGM1200MD: Connect a two wire line from RMMC to pins 1 and 2 of a
SubD, 9pin connector and connect to connector LGM1 on top of the cabinet.
NOTE: For LGM1200MD the ends of the dedicated line (station and remote side) have to be
terminated (600 ohms/47 nF parallel). The RC combination may be soldered to the
9pin SubD connector together with the two wire line.
- Switched line modem: Connect a two wire line from PTT/RMMC to pins 1 and 2 of a SubD, 9pin
connector and connect to connector LGM1 (or LGM2, LGM3, if modem assembled) on top of the
cabinet.
2.5.5.2 Connection of a local PC or Laptop
Connect V.24 cable (0Ćmodem cable) with SubD, 9pin from PC to connect. Local PC on top of cabinet.
2.5.5.3 Connection of Voice Signal for VAM
Connect a two wire line from RMMC to pins 1 and 2 of a SubD, 9pin connector and connect to connecĆ
tor VAM on top of the cabinet.
2.5.5.4 Connection of auxiliary Inputs/Outputs (LCP)
The Navaids installation contains an auxiliary interface (on LCP board) with 16 optocoupler inputs and
16 optocoupler outputs for additional signals which is at the user's disposal. The external wiring of
the OIO connectors is shown in Fig. 2-27.
2.5.5.5 Connection of auxiliary Analog and Temp inputs (CSL)
Connect voltage measurement lines to plug SubD, 9pin and connect to connector ANALOG on top
of the cabinet. Connect sensor PT1000 for temperature measurement via cable and tabs to X81/1,2
or 3,4, rear BP-C. The wiring is shown in fig. 2-28.
OIO-IN conn.
outside IAUX n VCC (+5 V)
2k2
IAUX 0...7 and IAUX 8...15 when active low load max.
<2V or <2k7
log. 0= max. 0.3 mA
log. 1= min. 0.7 mA
GND
outside
VCC (+5 V) / max. 24 V
IAUX 8...15 when active high

(selectablewith jumpers J1...4, refer to 6.2.4.1) IAUX n
GND
2k2
log. 0= max. 0.3 mA
log. 1= min. 0.7 mA/max. 10 mA
OIO-OUT conn.
outside OAUX n
OAUX 0...3/4...7/8...11/12...15 +
60 VDC
100 mA max.
NOTE: - GND
dc COM1 used for OAUX0...3
Only voltages in the SELV range (up to 60 VDC) must be COM3 used for OAUX4...7
COM4 used for OAUX8...11
connected to connectors OAUX . COM2 used for OAUX12...15
(SELV=Safety Extra Low Voltage)
Fig. 2-27 External wiring of auxiliary OIO connectors of LCP
Ed. 01.04 2-29

DVOR 432
Local PC operation, via connector Local PC
on top of the cabinet
ÊÊ
ÊÊ ÊÊ
ÊÊ ÊÊ
X87 X86 X79 X78
Analog signals to CSL (ext.) via
ÊÊ
X85 X82 connector ANALOG, top of
X94 X93 X92 X80
the cabinet
ÊÊ ÊÊ
control line BCPS
X99 X98 X97 X96 X77 X76 X84
ÊÊ
Voice input via connector VAM X73
on top of the cabinet BP-C X74
ÊÊ ÊÊ
X83
X95 -3 - 1
ÊÊ
X72 X71 -4 - 2
ÊÊ ÊÊ
Assignment of aux. measurement
inputs: X81 for temp. sensor PT1000
ÊÊ
ANALOG, SubD, 9pin
PIN ASSIGNMENT
ÊÊ ÊÊ
50W TX2
1 Analog IN 1 X70 TX1
BP-T
ÊÊ
X71 X84 100W
2 Analog IN 2 X81
X84 X81
3 Analog IN 3 (TX1)
X83
ÊÊ Ê
X72
4 Analog IN 4 X85 X82 50W TX2
5 Analog IN 5
ÊÊ Ê
100W TX1
6 Analog IN 6 X83 X82
ÊÊ ÊÊ
9 AGND
CA-100/1* TX2
ÊÊ
X84 X80
TX1
X85
ÊÊ ÊÊ
39k2 X80 Setting example: 100 W, TX1
A-IN X70
BP-T
ÊÊ
X71 X84 1
±20 V 10k
X81 TX2
X83 2
ÊÊ ÊÊ
X72 TX1
AGND (TX2) X85 X82
3
ÊÊ
ÊÊ ÊÊ
ÊÊ
X80
X81 BP-C, flat plug

PIN ASSIGNATION ÊÊ
ÊÊ
PMM ÊÊ TX2
X80
1
2
ÊÊ Ê
TX1
/1 TEMP1 3
/2 TEMP1 BP-DC
/3 TEMP2
/4 TEMP2
ÊÊ
ÊÊ
CA-100/2* ÊÊ
ÊÊ Ê
X81
5V
PT1000
1,3
3k9
TEMP ÊÊ
ÊÊ ÊÊ
ÊÊ ÊÊ
47k4
2,4
ÊÊ
AGND
ÊÊ ÊÊ
Battery and power supply connection C-BAR
control line BCPS**

ÊÊ
ÊÊ Ê * 100 W only
ÊÊ ÊÊ
BP-BCPS**
** NOTE:
This connector and the BP-
BCPS is used only, if BCPS modĆ
ground bolt (BSE) ules are located in the transmitter
rack. Used in 50 W version.
Fig. 2-28 Interface connections transmitter cabinet, rear side
2-30 Ed. 01.04

DVOR 432
A2 A4 A6 A8 A10 A12 A14 A16 A18 A20 A22 A24 A26 A28 A30 A32 A34 A36 A38 A40 A42 A44 A46 A48 A50
J3* X1/J1* J4*
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
MONITOR-DIPOLE
NOTE: The sideband antennas are connected via the matcher module (connector X1,X2); A51
optionally the decoupling module (connector X1, X2,X3, X4) and the coupling cables are available.
A1 A3 A5 A7 A9 A11 A13 A15 A17 A19 A21 A23 A25 A27 A29 A31 A33 A35 A37 A39 A41 A43 A45 47 A49
J3* X1/J1* J4*
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
SHELTER
W56 to monitor dipole
24029 28373 W55 24029 28316
TNC-male 4 m ±10 cm. RG 223 U
W53 27288 03878
W54 27288 03878 W51 27288 03808

W52 27288 03878 W1 W101
24029 28043
Z1 W2 W102
27288 03806
...
...
W82
W81 W57 24009 28159 ASU interface W49 W149

24029 28043
W58 24009 28162 BCPS-control line W50 W150
...
ASU
W72 24036 28027
BCPS
BCPS
ASU
CSB
SB2
SB1
MON 1
MON 2
SB1
SB2
CSB
ASU RACK connecting plate

ASU power supply C-bar
48VP2 ASU+
48VP2
ASU+ NAV+ TX1/TX2
NAV+ W61 24039 28226

NAV- GND
PMM
W63 24039 28228
GND NAV- fuse box
C-bar F1 BFUSE W69 24039 28234 50
50 A DC
2 4 23 to antenna A51 A1
X2
BFUSE W71 24039 28235 X1
W60 24039 28225 1 3 24
TRANSMITTER RACK W64 24039 28229 BAT2 0.2 A F2 24039 28234

to the antennas A1 to A50 Legend:
W70
1 2
Matcher module
W65 24039 28230 BAT1 W67 24039 28232
N
24039 28231 BAT0 3 4
W68 24039 28233 A1
W66 5 6 Mains distribution box X2
TNC
X4* X1 X3*
W73 BSE
BFUSE
BFUSE
BFUSE
BFUSE
W62
W74
NAV-
NAV+
+
NAV-
NAV+
-
BAT-
BAT+
Option:
BAT+
BAT-
BAT0
BAT1
BAT2
BAT0
BAT1
BAT2
BSE 24039 28227

AF
PE
Decoupling Module
L3
24039 28068
N
24039 28052 48 V battery box

BCPS-connection Plate BCPS Connection Plate
* Coupling cables and connectors in combination with
with DVOR installations 50 W with DVOR installations up to 100 W optional Decoupling module only
Fig. 2-29 System cabling DVOR
Ed. 01.04 2-31

DVOR 432
2.6 GROUNDING
2.6.1 General
The type of grounding implemented is dependent on the local terrain. Consequently it is only possible
to provide general guidelines here. Grounding conductors or rods are metallic elements of a particular
form which are either driven into the ground or laid in the ground so as to cover a relatively large area.
All connections in the ground must be welded and protected against corrosion. The ground resisĆ
tance required for a DVOR (or other navigation installations) can be given as 5 W. This resistance
can only be measured precisely with the aid of special ground resistance measuring equipment. The
exact measuring procedure is described in the operating instructions for these devices. Universally
valid instructions are given in Section 2.6.6. Sufficient grounding can generally be obtained if the
installation suggestions described below and the terrain conditions are paid attention to. When estiĆ
mating the ground resistance the length and extent of the network laid are the crucial points, not the
cross-sectional area of the conductors. Favorable resistance conditions are provided by arable land
and loamy ground (ground resistivity 100 W per meter). The data specified below applies to these
conditions. With other types of terrain the factors below must be taken into consideration (increase
in the resistance with respect to the basic values stated).
Moist sandy soil 2x
Dry sandy soil 5 to 10x
Gravel or stones up to 30x
If the ground is not chemically neutral, e.g. if it is salty, it may be necessary to coat all metal parts laid
in the ground with lead or to use a sufficiently non-corrosive steel (e.g. V2A). The different types are
as follows:
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ 0.5...1 m
Radial ground Ground rod or plate Interlinked ground
Fig. 2-30 Different types of ground conductor configuration
2.6.2 Strip or mesh Ground Conductors

Strip ground conductors take the form of a strip, round material or cable laid in the ground at a depth
of 0.5 to 1 m so as to cover a relatively large area.
Materials:
Steel strip (hot galvanized) 100 mm@, min. thickness 3 mm
Copper strip 50 mm@, min. thickness 2 mm
Copper cable (not finely stranded) 135 mm@
Ed. 01.04 2-33

DVOR 432
The network should be laid as symmetrical to the DVOR station as possible. The necessary length
and extension when laid in a straight line, should be estimated from the basic data below.
Strip length Ground resistance
25 m 10 W
50 m 5W
100 m 3W
2.6.3 Ground Rods
Ground rods are either pipes or U, L or T-shaped profiles driven vertically into the ground and 1 to
2 m in length. It is necessary to connect several ground rods together in order to reduce the grounding
resistance. The minimum spacing is twice the length of each ground rod.
Material: Steel (hot galvanized) Pipe 30 x 3 mm

Bracket L 65 x 65 x 7 mm
U-profile U 65 DIN 1026
T-profile T 60 DIN 1024
Probable grounding resistance of a rod: Length 1 m approx. 70 W

Length 2 m approx. 40 W
The material, cross sectional areas and grounding resistance of the connecting leads to the shelter
should be as for strip ground conductors, (see Section 2.6.2). When pipe-type grounding rods are
fastened with clamps, screws at least M10 in size should be used.
2.6.4 Ground Plates
Ground plates are solid perforated sheet metal plates with dimensions of approx. 0.5 x 1 m or
1 x 1 m, which are embedded vertically in the ground. The top edge of the plates should always be
at least 1 m below the surface. Several ground plates must be connected in parallel in order to reduce
the grounding resistance. The minimum spacing should be 3 m. Material:
Sheet steel (hot galvanized) min. thickness 3 mm

Sheet copper min. thickness 2 mm
The ground resistance of a plate 1 m@ is approx. 30 W. The data for the connecting conductors is speĆ
cified in the tables in Section 2.6.2.
2.6.5 Estimating the Ground Resistance
The resistance of each rod, each plate and each supply line used should be determined on the basis
of Section 2.6.2 to 2.6.4. They should be considered as parallel resistances. The resulting grounding
resistance should then be calculated as follows: 1/Rres =1/R1+1/R2+1/R3+...+ Rn. Taking into acĆ
count the nature of the terrain (for factors see Section 2.6.1) satisfactory grounding conditions can
be assumed if the ground resistance calculated from the base data is < 5 W. If the value calculated
is 5 W or more, we recommend measuring the ground resistance.
2-34 Ed. 01.04

DVOR 432
2.6.6 Measuring the Ground Resistance
See Fig. 2-31
Three measurements must be performed over a large area in order to determine the ground resisĆ
tance precisely. The distance between 2 auxiliary grounds required must be large in relation to the
complete ground network of the navigation installation. Two steel rods approx. 1 m long should be
used as auxiliary grounds (reinforcing bars); these should be driven into the ground with only a few
centimeters remaining at the designated points. It is essential that the rods are of equal length and
are driven in to the same depth.
Connection to framework/counterpoise
Grounding plate
approx. 10 m
DVOR shelter
>50 m >50 m
>50 m
Auxiliary ground 1 Auxiliary ground 2
Fig. 2-31 Determining of the ground resistance

Example of a DVOR plate ground with 5 x 2 plates, each 1 m2. The drawing is not to scale. A theoretical
ground resistance of approx. 2 W (good) would be obtained on the basis of the 10 plates, connecting
conductors and assumed terrain conditions (e.g. arable land) in accordance with the formula in SecĆ
tion 2.6.5.
Measurements are performed as shown in the diagram below:

E = Installation ground E
H1 = Auxiliary ground 1
M1 M3
H2 = Auxiliary ground 2
M1 = Measured value 1
H1 H2
M2
Measured value 1: Resistance between installation ground and auxiliary ground 1

Measured value 2: Resistance between auxiliary ground 1 and auxiliary ground 2
Measured value 3: Resistance between installation ground and auxiliary ground 2
Ed. 01.04 2-35

DVOR 432
When the three measurements have been performed the ground resistance is calculated as follows:
Corr. meas. value 1 + corr. meas. 3 - corr. meas. value 2

Ground resistance =
2
The measurement is falsified by the resistance of the 2 test leads. The cross-sectional area of the
test leads should not be less than 1.5 mm@ in order to ensure an adequate breaking strength. With
this cross-sectional area and an assumed length of 2 x 25 m = 50 m, the falsifying resistance would
be 0.58 W. This resistance should therefore be measured and deducted from measured values 1, 2
and 3. The measured values corrected in this manner are entered into the above formula.
2-36 Ed. 01.04

DVOR 432
2.7 COLLOCATION WITH DME
2.7.1 Overview
See Figs. 2-33, 2-43, 2-44.
This description concerns to the collocation of DME FSD 40/45 or DME 415/435 with a DVOR 432.
The DME equipment is normally located in the DVOR shelter. To synchronize the identification, the
collocated DME uses an interface with the DVOR system. To transfer "Maintenance" and "Status" of
the DME a RS 232-cable connection is established between DVOR and DME if these are not conĆ
nected with an individual modem (internal or external) to the Tower resp. RCSE 443 via a 2 wire line
connection. These examples are shown in Fig. 2-43 and 2-44. The terminal points in the AF-distriĆ
bution box, which may be used for 2 wire connection, are shown in Fig. 2-33.
Further information to the DME FSD 40/45 will be found in the Technical Manual Ref.No. 8BR 02016
1000 DEGFA, to the DME 415/435 in the manual Ref.No. 8BR 0212 1000 DEGFA.
2.7.2 Connection of FSD 40/45 to DVOR 432

See Figs. 2-32, 2-34, 2-37.
The FSD 40/45 is installed in two versions: a CSB-version and an IOM-version. The CSB-version
itself is built in a version with the connector panel (I/O-panel) mounted at the rear side of the cabinet,
and another version with the connector panel mounted on top of the cabinet (Fig. 2-34, 2-37).
The CSB-versions are described in Section 2.7.2.1 and 2.7.2.2, the IOM-version in Section 2.7.2.3.
Fig. 2-32 shows the pin assignment of the DME-IDENT and LGM2 interface (DVOR) used to conĆ
nect the DME. Regard the configuration of the subassembly CSL of the DVOR in Section 2.7.2.4. CorĆ
responding information to the DME will be found in the corresponding manual.
2.7.2.1 CSB-Version, I/O-panel at the rear of cabinet

See Figs. 2-34, 2-35, 2-36.
- Lay the ID-cable (Ref.No. 24009 28148) in the shelter cable duct. Connect it to the connector
VOR(SK26) on the rear side of the DME cabinet and to connector DME-IDENT on top of the DVOR
cabinet (Fig. 2-34 and 2-35).
- To establish the RS 232 connection plug adapter Ref.No. 97243 28211 (Fig. 2-34 and 2-36) to
connector PL1 at the DME I/O panel, rear side.
- Place the RS 232-cable (Ref.No. 97240 28166) in the shelter cable duct. Connect it to the adapter
(DME cabinet) and to connector LGM2 on top of the DVOR cabinet.
2.7.2.2 CSB-Version, I/O-panel on top of the cabinet

See Figs. 2-37, 2-38, 2-39.
IFV/SK10 on top of the DME cabinet and to connector DME-IDENT on top of the DVOR cabinet
(Fig. 2-37 and 2-38).
connector PL1 at the DME I/O panel, on top of the cabinet.
Ed. 01.04 2-37

DVOR 432
2.7.2.3 IOM-Version
See Figs. 2-40, 2-41, 2-42.
VOR(SK26) on the rear side of the DME cabinet and to connector DME-IDENT on top of the DVOR
cabinet (Fig. 2-40 and 2-41).
connector "AUX1" on the DME IOM, at the rear side of the cabinet, lower section.
2.7.2.4 Configuration of DVOR 432 and DME FSD 40/45

- DVOR 432:
Set switch S5 (see Section 6.2.4) on front of the CSL (Ref.No. 83134 23101), which is set for stanĆ
dard use of the DVOR, to position "ASSOC." for the application with a collocated DME FSD 40/45.
- DME FSD 40/45:
Refer to Technical Manual, Ref.No. 8BR 020 161000 DEGFA.
2-38 Ed. 01.04

DVOR 432
DVOR 432 cabinet
rear top
(RS 232-connection)
1
6
2 RX
LGM2
7
3 TX
8
W1xx 9
4
5 GND
X98 20
1
2
21
3
22
4
Subrack BP-C 23
5
24
6
25
7
26
8
DME IDENT
27
9
28
10
29
11
30
IDENT from CSL X2
12
31
13
32
14
33
15
24V ID 34
W100 DMSL 35
16 DME-ID
17 DMSR
VOR OP 36
18 DMOVS
GND DME 37
19 GND DME
X85
Fig. 2-32 Interface Assignment of LGM2 and DME-Ident in DVOR 432
Terminal bar AF distribution box

Plug-in holder for overvoltage arrester removed
3a 3a
3b 3b
2a 2a
2b 2b
1a 1a
1b 1b
Fig. 2-33 AF-distribution box, assignment of terminals (example)
Ed. 01.04 2-39

DVOR 432
Shelter
97240 28166
RS 232
24009 28148
ID
LGM2 DME-IDENT
I/O-Panel
Adapter
PL1
VOR (SK26)
DVOR DME
(FSD 40/45)
(CSB-Version)
Fig. 2-34 CSB-Version, I/O panel at cabinet rear side, connection DVOR to DME
DVOR 432 DME FSD 40/45

connector DME-IDENT connector VOR(SK26)
37pin, male 25pin, female
SIGNAL NAME PIN PIN SIGNAL NAME
DME-ID 16 16 4 4 MORCO
DMOVS 18 18 6 6 BCNFTY
GNDDME 19 19 24 24 SIGNAL GND
37 37 3 3 SIGNAL GND
U15+ 33 5 5 SIGNAL GND
VOR OP 36 36 25 25 AFFTY
24V ID 34 34 12 12 +24V
DMSL 35 35
DMSR 17 17
1 kOhm
24009 28148 (ID cable)
Fig. 2-35 CSB-Version, I/O panel at cabinet rear side, ident connection DVOR to DME
DVOR 432 DME FSD 40/45,

connector LGM2 connector PL1
9pin, male 25pin, male
97243 28211
(Adapter, male/female) PIN SIGNAL NAME
SIGNAL NAME PIN
RX 2 2 2 2 TD (BA)
TX 3 3 3 3 RD (BB)
GND 5 5 5 7 SC, CR, (AB) GND
RS232
RS232
97240 28166 (9pin, female/female, 3 m)
Fig. 2-36 CSB-Version, I/O panel at cabinet rear side, RS 232 connection DVOR/DME
2-40 Ed. 01.04

DVOR 432
Shelter
97240 28166
RS 232
24009 28148
ID
IFV/SK10
DME-IDENT Adapter
LGM2
PL1
DVOR DME
(FSD 40/45)
(CSB-Version)
Fig. 2-37 CSB-Version, I/O panel on cabinet top, connection DVOR to DME

connector DME-IDENT connector IFV/SK10
24V ID 34 34 12 12 +24V
DMSL 35 35
DMSR 17 17
1 kOhm
24009 28148 (ID cable)
Fig. 2-38 CSB-Version, I/O panel on cabinet top, ident connection DVOR/DME

connector LGM2 connector PL1
97243 28211 PIN SIGNAL NAME
(Adapter, male/female)
SIGNAL NAME PIN
RX 2 2 2 2 TD (BA)
TX 3 3 3 3 RD (BB)
RS232
RS232
Fig. 2-39 CSB-Version, I/O panel on cabinet top, RS 232 connection DVOR/DME
Ed. 01.04 2-41

DVOR 432
Shelter 97240 28168

RS 232
24009 28148
ID
LGM2 DME-IDENT
DME
(FSD 40/45)
VOR (SK26)
Adapter
DVOR IOM
AUX 1
(IOM-Version)
Fig. 2-40 IOM-Version, connector panel at cabinet rear side, connection DVOR to DME

connector DME-IDENT connector VOR(SK26)
24V ID 34 34 12 12 +24V
DMSL 35 35
DMSR 17 17
1 kOhm
24009 28148 (AF cable)
Fig. 2-41 IOM-Version, connector panel at cabinet rear side, ident connection DVOR/DME

connector LGM2 connector AUX1
97243 28214
(Adapter, female/female) PIN SIGNAL NAME
SIGNAL NAME PIN
RX 2 2 2 2 TD (BA)
TX 3 3 3 3 RD (BB)
RS232
RS232
97240 28168 (9pin, female/male, 5 m)
Fig. 2-42 IOM-Version, connector panel at cabinet rear side, RS 232 connection DVOR/DME
2-42 Ed. 01.04

DVOR 432
DVOR-Shelter
alternativ
ext. Modem
LGM 1200
DME DME
Modem
FSD 40/45 FSD 40/45 DVOR 432
(CSB-Version) (CSB-Versison)
RS 232
IFV LGM1
IFV PL2 3) (SK10)
PL7
2)
DME-IDENT
(SK10)
1)
24009 28148
ID
AF distribution box
placing at disposal by the

1) airport
LGM1
1 1 La
1a
2 2 Lb
1b
3 3 PL7
. . La AF distribution box
. . 1 1 2a
Lb
9 6 6 2b
9
Tower
4)
AF distribution box
9 9
terminal bar
(connection example) RCSE 443
2)
Note:
1) Line connection (2-wire to SubD 9pin connector) for connection to LGM1, assembled on site
2) Line connection (2-wire to SubD 9pin connector) for connection to PL7, assembled on site
3) Connection of 2-wire line according to modem documentation, assembled on site
4) Connection refer to Technical Manual of RCSE 443
Fig. 2-43 Cable connections to DVOR and DME FSD 40/45

DVOR-Shelter
alternativ
ext. Modem
LGM 1200
DME DME
Modem
415/435 415/435 DVOR 432

RS 232
LGM1
SK4/AF1 PL1/Port 3 3) SK4/AF1 PL7
2)
DME-IDENT
24009 28149
1)
ID
AF distribution box
placing at disposal by the

1) airport
LGM1
1 1 La
1a
2 2 Lb
1b
3 3 PL7
. . La AF distribution box
. . 1 1 2a
Lb
9 6 6 2b
9
Tower
4)
AF distribution box
9 9
terminal bar
(connection example) RCSE 443
2)
Note:
1) Line connection (2-wire to SubD 9pin connector) for connection to LGM1, assembled on site
2) Line connection (2-wire to SubD 9pin connector) for connection to PL7, assembled on site
3) Connection of 2-wire line according to modem documentation, assembled on site
4) Connection refer to Technical Manual of RCSE 443
Fig. 2-44 Cable connections to DVOR and DME 415/435

Ed. 01.04 2-43

DVOR 432
2.7.3 Connection of DME 415/435 to DVOR 432

2.7.3.1 Ident and RS232 connection
See Fig. 2-45 to 2-47.
- Lay the ID-cable (24009 28149) in the shelter cable duct. Connect it to the connector SK4/AF1
on top of the DME cabinet and to connector DME-IDENT on top of the CVOR/DVOR cabinet (Fig.
2-45 and 2-46).
connector PL1/Port 3 on top of the DME cabinet.
(on top of DME cabinet) and to connector LGM2/DME on top of the CVOR/DVOR cabinet.
NOTE: Ground (DME IDENT, Pin 19) is not connected to DME. Shielding of ID cable is connected
one-sided to DME connector ground.
The adapter 97243 28211 can be ommitted if a RS 232 cable is used with 1:1 through conĆ
nection (not crossed).
2.7.3.2 Configuration of DVOR 432 and DME 415/435

DVOR 432, setting switches or jumper of CSL (Ref. No. 83134 23101, see Section 6.2.4):
- Set switch S5 to position ASSOC. (NAV 400 is Master) for the collocation with DME 415/435.
- Set X25 to position 2-3, DME-OP via signalling line.
- Set X11/X12 to position 2-3 (optocoupler only) as default for CVOR/DVOR.
- All other are set according default or normal postion as shown in Section 6.2.4.
DME 415/435: Refer to Technical Manual, Ref.No. 8BR 02012 1000 DEGFA, Volume 1, Dec. 1998:
- Configuration of AFI: Regard that path M5, M2, M3 is set to "Internal Source" (delivery position)
- Enter in user SW program:
AF Status Low
ID Code/trigger from AF Low
DME Status Low
Morse Code Slave Trigger / Slave Code
Ident Recovery On Sensing
2-44 Ed. 01.04

DVOR 432
Shelter
RS 232 cable 97240 28166
ID-cable
24009 28149
LGM2/DME
DME-IDENT SK4/AF1 Adapter
PL1/Port3
DVOR DME
415/435
Fig. 2-45 Collocation CVOR/DVOR with DME 415/435

DVOR 432 DME 415/435
connector DME-IDENT connector SK4/AF1
SIGNAL PIN PIN SIGNAL
DME-ID 16 16 1 1 DIDFAFL
DMOVS 18 18 4 4 DBCOKL
DMSR 17 17 17 17 DBCOKH
GND DME 19 19 1)
U15+ 33
VOR/LOC OP 36 36 2 2 DAFSTL
24V ID 34 34 14 14 DIDFAFH
DMSL 35 35 15 15 DAFSTH
24009 28149 (ID cable)

NOTE:
1) Ground not connected between DVOR (pin 19) and DME
Fig. 2-46 Ident connection CVOR/DVOR to DME 415/435
DVOR 432 DME 415/435

connector LGM2/DME connector PL1/Port 3
97243 28211 PIN SIGNAL
(Adapter, male/female)
SIGNAL PIN
RX 2 2 2 2 TXD
TX 3 3 3 3 RXD
GND 5 5 5 7 PGND
RS232
RS232
NOTE:
The adapter can be ommitted, if other RS 232 cable is used, which has no crossed lines between pin 2 and 3
Fig. 2-47 RS232 connection CVOR/DVOR to DME 415/435
Ed. 01.04 2-45

DVOR 432
2.8 INSTALLATION OF THE DME ANTENNA

See Fig. 2-48.
The DME antenna is mounted on a mast which is vertically installed on a support at the edge of the
counterpoise. An obstruction light is mounted on the top of the mast. An additional pipe below the
counterpoise is provided to guide the DME antenna cables to the centre of the counterpoise and into
the Shelter. Refer also to Technical Manual for DME FSD 40/45 or DME 415/435 manual.
WARNING
Before connecting the obstruction light supply cable check that mains is switched off and
mains lead is dead.
obstruction light DME antenna trestle antenna mast pipe support
DME antenna
Mast
DVOR antennas
Counterpoise DVOR
Pipe
shelter
U-girder
Fig. 2-48 Arrangement and installation of the DME antenna (example AAN 86), principle view
2-46 Ed. 01.04

DVOR 432
Operation and Maintenance Operation
CHAPTER 3
OPERATION
3.1 GENERAL
Standard operation is normally carried out via a remote control interface with the user program
ADRACS installed on a PC. For local operation only a few functions are operable with the local control
panel (LCP). It consists of a Local Control CPU board (LC-CPU) and the Local Control Interface (LCI)
for main status indication, equipment status and measurement data and manual controls (switch
commands) for basic control functions. The alignment procedure and the maintenance are perĆ
formed with a locally connected PC.
3.2 LOCAL CONTROL INTERFACE

See Fig. 3-1.
The Local Control Interface (LCI) provides different indication and control components:
- three indication lamps for the main status of the system (ALARM, WARNING, NORMAL)
- a menu driven liquid crystal display screen (16 lines x 40 characters) for indication of station name
and type, status of monitor(s) and transmitter(s) and measurement data,
- four control buttons to perform simple activities like change-over or disconnect the transmitter(s)
- a key-lock switch to select different operational modes of the station, i.e. disable/enable local and
remote control of the station (REMOTE, LOCAL, MAINTENANCE); the actual mode is presented
on the LCD screen.
A serial connector RS 232 (Local PC) is located on the top of the transmitter rack to interconnect a
local PC/laptop. A test of the three indication lamps of the LCI is provided by pressing the two middle
control buttons simultaneously.
The meaning of the indications, buttons and the key-lock switch on the LCI is described in the followĆ
ing sections.
NOTE: A buzzer sounds for a short time whenever one of the control buttons is pressed.
ALARM MONITOR–1 NORMAL EXECUTIVE

main MONITOR–2 NORMAL EXECUTIVE
status WARNING liquid
AERIAL TX–1 ON
indication DUMMY TX–2 OFF crystal
lamps display
NORMAL
MAINTENANCE NORMAL screen
OPER. MODE REMOTE
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
MENU XMTR MON DATA
REMOTE
LOCAL
key- MAINTENANCE
lock control
switch buttons
Fig. 3-1 Local Control Interface (LCI), example
Ed. 01.04 3-1

DVOR 432
Operation Operation and Maintenance
3.2.1 Indication Lamps for Main Status
ALARM red Monitor 1 and Monitor 2 are in ALARM state (i.e. relevant signals are
out of tolerance).
WARNING yellow The station is supplied by battery or

one or both monitor(s) is (are) in bypassed mode or
has a BITE warning.
NORMAL green All transmitter and monitor equipment is switched on, initialized and
serviceable for the intended category of operations (no WARNING
and no ALARM).
3.2.2 Liquid Crystal Display Screen for Indication and Control of the System
3.2.2.1 General Structure
The liquid crystal display screen is used to indicate the system status with details to the monitor status,
the transmitter status and the status of maintenance data (e.g. power supply). The actual selected
operational mode (set by key-lock switch) is also presented. Additionally the display screen provides
simple activities to change the system state by means of the control buttons below the display screen
and to present measurement data of the system.
After switching on the equipment a Welcome window appears on the display screen, where the operĆ
ator gets information about the actual system and where he can start the application (see section
3.2.2.2). After start of the application the System Status window appears, which contains information
about the actual system status and operational mode (see section 3.2.2.3). This window also provides
functions to the operator to initiate simple control commands (see section 3.2.2.4) and to indicate
different system data (see section 3.2.2.6).
The following example shows a System Status window for the Main Status NORMAL and the key-
lock switch set to state REMOTE.
MONITOR–1 NORMAL EXECUTIVE

system status AERIAL TX–1 ON
DUMMY TX–2 OFF
MAINTENANCE NORMAL actual operational

OPER. MODE REMOTE mode selected by
key-lock switch
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– Menu line with

MENU XMTR MON DATA meaning of
control buttons
Fig. 3-2 Liquid crystal display screen of the Local Control Interface (LCI), example
3-2 Ed. 01.04

DVOR 432
The System Status indication comprises the following information:
Monitor status information of MONITOR-1/2:
NORMAL EXECUTIVE Monitor is executive in normal operation.
PREALARM EXECUTIVE Monitor is executive, corresponding transmitter TX 1/2 initiates a
pre-alarm condition in the Monitor.
ALARM EXECUTIVE Monitor is executive, corresponding transmitter TX 1/2 initiates an
alarm condition in the Monitor.
FAULTY EXECUTIVE Monitor is executive, Monitor itself has faulty condition.
WARNING BYPASS Monitor is switched to bypassed mode because of maintenance
purposes, Monitor is not in monitoring mode.
Transmitter status information of TX-1/2:
AERIAL ON The output of the corresponding transmitter (TX-1/2) is connected
to the antenna (and CSB- or SBO-power is not switched off).
AERIAL WARNING Transmitter BITE detects BITE warning in the corresponding trans-
mitter TX-1/2.
AERIAL OFF The output of the corresponding transmitter (TX 1/2) is connected to
the antenna (and CSB- or SBO-power is switched off).
AERIAL SHUT-DOWN Corresponding transmitter TX-1/2 is switched off due to monitor
alarm detection, TX is not ready for operation.
DUMMY OFF Corresponding transmitter TX-1/2 is connected with dummy load
and switched off via SW command, but ready for operation (after
switch-over command).
DUMMY SHUT-DOWN Corresponding transmitter TX-1/2 is switched off due to monitor
alarm detection, TX is not ready for operation.
MAINTENANCE status information:
NORMAL No maintenance alert, maintenance data is in valid range.
WARNING Maintenance alert, i.e. problems during configuration or power
supply problems.
The actual operational mode (on display screen 'OPER. MODE') selected by the key-lock switch
may have the following states:
REMOTE The equipment is operating in REMOTE mode (i.e. no local control
on LCP). Data can be requested from the PC connected with remote
control (RMMC) or from local PC, the programming of the station via
local or remote PC is possible (if user login level is high enough).
LOCAL The equipment is operating in LOCAL mode. Data can be requested
from remote control side (RMMC), but not programmed. This is only
possible by local PC.
MAINTENANCE * The equipment is locked (indication MAINTENANCE). This opera-
tional state is similar to the REMOTE mode, except that no data
programming is possible and the set of equipment operational
controls is the bare minimum needed for control tower personnel
to manipulate the equipment (e.g. transmitter on/off).
* on some LCP front panels LOCK instead of MAINTENANCE is used
Ed. 01.04 3-3

DVOR 432
3.2.2.2 Welcome Window

After switching on the equipment the following Welcome window appears on the display screen:
ALARM WELCOME TO THALES ATM NAVIGATION
WARNING
ACTUAL INSTALLATION:
DVOR 432 100W DUAL

NORMAL STATION: DVOR_SITE
SELECT MENU FOR START

––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
MENU
Fig. 3-3 Welcome window, example
For the Welcome window the following control button is available:

MENU Start of application.
After pressing the MENU control button the System Status window (see Fig. 3-4) appears.
3.2.2.3 System Status Windows

A System Status window contains information about the status of the monitor(s) and the transmitter(s)
and about the status of maintenance data. It also indicates the actual operational mode, which is set
by the key-lock switch (see section 3.2.3).
For the System Status window the following control buttons are available:
MENU Calls submenu MENU LIST for selection of one of the control or data indication
submenus.
XMTR Calls submenu TRANSMITTER CONTROLS for selection of a certain transmitter
command.
MON Calls submenu MONITOR CONTROLS for selection of a certain monitor bypass
command.
DATA Calls indication MONITOR DATA .
This section gives an overview of different System Status windows depending on the actual Main StaĆ
tus of the system. The different states of monitors, transmitters, maintenance data and of the operaĆ
tional mode are described in section 3.2.2.1.
The following example of a System Status window with Main Status NORMAL indicates that both monĆ
itors are executive in normal operation. The output of the transmitter TX-1 is connected to the anĆ
tenna (and CSB- or SBA/SBB-power is not switched off) and transmitter TX-2 is connected with
dummy load and switched off via SW command, but ready for operation. No maintenance alert exists
and the actual operational mode is set by key-lock switch to REMOTE mode.
3-4 Ed. 01.04

DVOR 432
ALARM

WARNING MONITOR–2 NORMAL EXECUTIVE
AERIAL TX–1 ON
DUMMY TX–2 OFF
NORMAL
MAINTENANCE NORMAL
OPER. MODE REMOTE
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
MENU XMTR MON DATA
Fig. 3-4 System Status window with status 'NORMAL', example
The following example of a System Status window with Main Status ALARM indicates that both moniĆ
tors are executive, the aerial transmitter TX-2 initiated an alarm condition before it was shut-down
by the monitor and the standby transmitter TX-1 was already shut-down (not ready for operation).
No maintenance alert exists and the actual operational mode is set by key-lock switch to REMOTE
mode.
ALARM
MONITOR–1 ALARM EXECUTIVE

WARNING MONITOR–2 ALARM EXECUTIVE
AERIAL TX–2 SHUT–DOWN

DUMMY TX–1 SHUT–DOWN
NORMAL
MAINTENANCE NORMAL
OPER. MODE REMOTE
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
MENU XMTR MON DATA = sparkling indication
Fig. 3-5 System Status window with status 'ALARM', both transmitters are switched off
(shut down), example
Ed. 01.04 3-5

DVOR 432
The following examples 1,2 and 3 of System Status windows with Main Status WARNING present difĆ
ferent causes for WARNING condition with the corresponding states for monitors and transmitters.
The causes are added as comments in italic letters on the right side of each System Status window.
For the detailed description of the states see section 3.2.2.1.
ALARM
MONITOR–1 PREALARM EXECUTIVE Warning status

because of pre-alarm
AERIAL TX–1 ON
DUMMY TX–2 OFF
NORMAL
MAINTENANCE NORMAL
OPER. MODE REMOTE
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
ALARM

AERIAL TX–2 ON Warning status

because of switch-over
DUMMY TX–1 SHUT–DOWN to TX 2
NORMAL
MAINTENANCE NORMAL
OPER. MODE REMOTE
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
MENU XMTR MON DATA
Fig. 3-6 System Status window with status 'Warning', examples 1
3-6 Ed. 01.04

DVOR 432
ALARM

AERIAL TX–1 ON Warning status

because of
DUMMY TX–2 SHUT–DOWN shut-down of TX 2
NORMAL
MAINTENANCE NORMAL
OPER. MODE REMOTE
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
MENU XMTR MON DATA
ALARM
MONITOR–1 NORMAL EXECUTIVE Warning status

because of
WARNING MONITOR–2 FAULTY EXECUTIVE faulty monitor 2
AERIAL TX–1 ON
NORMAL
MAINTENANCE NORMAL
OPER. MODE LOCAL
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
MENU XMTR MON DATA
ALARM
MONITOR–1 PREALARM EXECUTIVE

AERIAL TX–2 WARNING Warning status

because of
DUMMY TX–1 OFF BIT alert of TX 2
NORMAL
MAINTENANCE NORMAL
OPER. MODE LOCAL
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
Fig. 3-7 System Status window with status 'WARNING', examples 2
Ed. 01.04 3-7

DVOR 432
ALARM
MONITOR–1 NORMAL EXECUTIVE Warning status

because of
WARNING MONITOR–2 ALARM EXECUTIVE Monitor AND configuration
(Monitor 2 is in ALARM
state)
AERIAL TX–1 ON
NORMAL
MAINTENANCE NORMAL
OPER. MODE MAINTENANCE
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
MENU XMTR MON DATA
ALARM
MONITOR–1 WARNING BYPASS Warning status

because of
WARNING MONITOR–2 WARNING BYPASS bypassed monitors
AERIAL TX–1 ON
DUMMY TX–2 OFF
NORMAL
MAINTENANCE NORMAL
OPER. MODE REMOTE
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
Fig. 3-8 System Status window with status 'WARNING', example 3
3.2.2.4 System Control Windows

A System Control window provides functions to initiate simple control commands by actuating one
of the control buttons XMTR, MON and DATA or by selecting a control menu after actuating the MENU
button. The System Control windows providing the control commands are described within this secĆ
tion. Two types of System Control windows exist:
- the window TRANSMITTER CONTROLS with commands to switch a transmitter on/off/main or to
reset the transmitter,
- the window MONITOR CONTROLS with commands to set/reset the monitor(s) to/from bypass
mode.
For the System Control windows the following control buttons are available:
BACK Return back to System Status window.
↑ (up) Scrolling up within command list (actual position is marked with '>' ).
↓ (down) Scrolling down within command list (actual position is marked with '>' ).
ENTER Activate selected command (marked with '>').
3-8 Ed. 01.04

DVOR 432
MAINTENANCE NORMAL
OPER. MODE LOCAL System Status window
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
MENU XMTR MON DATA
press control button

XMTR
TRANSMITTER CONTROLS System Control window

(transmitter commands)
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
> SWITCH TX–1 OFF

SWITCH TX–2 ON actual transmitter state:
SWITCH TX–2 TO MAIN AERIAL TX 1 ON
DUMMY TX 2 OFF
RESET TX–1/2
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
BACK ↑ ↓ ENTER
Fig. 3-9 System Control window TRANSMITTER CONTROLS, example
MAINTENANCE NORMAL
OPER. MODE LOCAL System Status window
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
MENU XMTR MON DATA

MON
MONITOR CONTROLS System Control window

(monitor commands)
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
> SWITCH MON–1/2 BYPASS OFF

SWITCH MON–1 BYPASS OFF actual monitor state:
SWITCH MON–2 BYPASS OFF MONITOR 1 BYPASS ON
MONITOR 2 BYPASS ON
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
BACK ↑ ↓ ENTER
Fig. 3-10 System Control window MONITOR CONTROLS, example
Ed. 01.04 3-9

DVOR 432
If the right control button ENTER is pressed in the System Control window of Fig. 3-10 the monitor
command 'SWITCH MON-1/2 BYPASS OFF' is selected (the actual command line is marked with
'>') and will be carried out immediately. The display screen indicates the System Status window again
(with the changed status of MON-1/2).
3.2.2.5 System DATA Window
If the operator is pressing the DATA button of the System Status window monitor data for MON 1 and
MON 2 is indicated (MONITOR DATA), see Fig. 3-11. Exit this window by pressing Back.
DUMMY TX–2 OFF
MAINTENANCE NORMAL System Status window
OPER. MODE LOCAL
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
MENU XMTR MON DATA

DATA
MONITOR DATA
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
MON 1 MON 2
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
RF LEVEL 98 % 98 %
AZIMUTH 357dg 358dg
30HZ AM 30.1% 29.8%
9960HZ AM 29.4% 30.4%
FM INDEX 16.0 15.9
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
BACK
Fig. 3-11 DATA window to indicate monitoring data
3-10 Ed. 01.04

DVOR 432
3.2.2.6 MENU LIST Window
The MENU LIST window (Fig. 3-12) shows the list of the submenus which can be selected for indicaĆ
tion at the LCP screen. If the operator is pressing the MENU control button of System Status window
a list of system control and data indication menus appears:
- TRANSMITTER CONTROLS (calls submenu TRANSMITTER CONTROLS, see Fig. 3-9)

- MONITOR CONTROLS (calls submenu MONITOR CONTROLS, see Fig. 3-10)
- MONITOR DATA (calls submenu MONITOR DATA, see Fig. 3-11)
- TRANSMITTER DATA (calls submenu AERIAL TRANSMITTER DATA, see Fig. 3-13)
- TRANSMITTER BIT DATA (not supported currently)
- MAINTENANCE DATA (not supported currently)
For the MENU window the following control buttons are available:
↑ (up) Scolling up within command/data list (actual position is marked with '>' ).
↓ (down) Scolling down within command/data list (actual position is marked with '>' ).
SELECT Selects menu item (marked with '>').
For the control windows the following control buttons are available:
↑ (up) Scolling up within command/data list (actual position is marked with '>' ).
↓ (down) Scolling down within command/data list (actual position is marked with '>' ).
ENTER Activate selected command (marked with '>').
For the data indication windows the following control button is available:
BACK Return back to MENU window.
MENU LIST menu TRANSMITTER DATA

––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– has been selected
> TRANSMITTER CONTROLS

MONITOR CONTROLS
MONITOR DATA
TRANSMITTER DATA
TRANSMITTER BIT DATA
MAINTENANCE DATA
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
BACK ↑ ↓ SELECT
Fig. 3-12 MENU LIST window, example
Ed. 01.04 3-11

DVOR 432
menu TRANSMITTER DATA

AERIAL TRANSMITTER DATA has been selected
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
XMTR 1
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
CARRIER POWER 100W
SBA LEVEL 40.0%
SBA RF PHASE 102 dg
SBB LEVEL 39.5%
SBB PHASE 124 dg
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
BACK
Fig. 3-13 Data Indication window AERIAL TRANSMITTER DATA, example
3.2.3 Key-lock Switch on LCP front Panel

With the three position key-lock switch in the left corner of the LCP the operator can select different
operational modes of the station, i.e. disable/enable local and remote control of the station (REMOTE,
LOCAL, MAINTENANCE); the actual mode is presented on the LCD screen (see Fig. 3-14).
REMOTE
The equipment is operating in REMOTE mode (i.e. no local control on LCP is possible). Data can
be requested from the PC connected with remote control (RMMC) or from local PC, the programĆ
ming of the station via local or remote PC is possible (if user login level is high enough).
LOCAL
The equipment is operating in LOCAL mode. Data can be requested from remote control side
(RMMC), but not programmed. This is only possible by local PC.
MAINTENANCE *
Similar to REMOTE mode, except that no programming of data can be made and the set of equipĆ
ment operational controls is the bare minimum needed for control tower personnel to manipulate
the equipment (e.g. transmitter on/off).
* on some LCP front panels LOCK instead of MAINTENANCE is used.
key-lock switch
MAINTENANCE NORMAL
REMOTE OPER. MODE LOCAL
LOCAL
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
MAINTENANCE MENU XMTR MON DATA
actual operational
mode selected by
key-lock switch
Fig. 3-14 Key-lock switch and indication of operational mode on LCD screen, example
3-12 Ed. 01.04

DVOR 432
3.3 CONTROLS AND INDICATIONS ON THE SUBASSEMBLIES
See Figs. 3-15 and 3-16.
The controls and indications of individual subassemblies are explained in the figures 3-15 and 3-16.
Specialities are explained in the following.
Subassembly CSL, TEG-operation (Fig. 3-16): BCD switch (red) Position 0 to F

The following signals are assigned to the switch positions in the CVOR/DVOR range:
- 0 30 Hz AM, 30 %; 9960 Hz AM, 30 %; 30 Hz FM Mod.-Index=16; Azimuth= 0 degrees
- 2 30 Hz AM, 30 %; 9960 Hz AM, 30 % 30 Hz FM Mod.-Index=16; Azimuth= 90 degrees
- 3 30 Hz AM, 30 %; 9960 Hz AM, 30 %; 30 Hz FM Mod.-Index=16; Azimuth=135 degrees
- 4 30 Hz AM, 30 %; 9960 Hz AM, 30 % 30 Hz FM Mod.-Index=16; Azimuth=180 degrees
- A 30 Hz AM, 30 %; 9960 Hz AM, 30 %; 30 Hz FM Mod.-Index=15; Azimut= 0 degrees
- B 30 Hz AM, 30 %; 9960 Hz AM, 30 %; 30 Hz FM Mod.-Index=17; Azimut= 0 degrees
- C 30 Hz AM, 30 %; 9960 Hz AM, 30 %; 30 Hz FM Mod.-Index=25; Azimut= 0 degrees
- D Spare
- E Spare
- F Spare
Ed. 01.04 3-13

DVOR 432
ÊÊ Ê MSP
ÊÊ ÊÊ TXDA lamp
RXDA lamp
CPU live lamp, green
ÊÊ ÊÊ
Modem*
Modem*
Modem*
VAM*
ÊÊ ASU-INT
MSP-1
MSP-2
ÊÊ ÊÊ
--
--
LCP
CSL
pushbutton manual reset
DCC-05
ÊÊ
ÊÊ ÊÊ morse code indication
ÊÊ
earphone jack (voice, ATIS)
ÊÊ
ÊÊ ÊÊ MSG-C
ÊÊ Ê
TXDA lamp, green
MOD-110***
RXDA lamp, green

MOD-110P/
ÊÊ Ê
MOD-110
MOD-110
DCC-MV
MSG-C
MSG-S
ÊÊ ÊÊ
SYN
CCP
ÊÊ
ÊÊ
ÊÊ Ê pushbutton manual reset
ÊÊ ÊÊ CPU live lamp, green

MOD-110***
MOD-110P/
MOD-110
MOD-110
DCC-MV
MSG-C
MSG-S
ÊÊ ÊÊ
SYN
CCP
ÊÊ DC/DC ok (LED)
ÊÊ
ÊÊ ÊÊ
ÊÊ
ËË ËË ËË PMM
ÊÊ
ÊÊ
ËË ËË
ÊÊ
ËË ËË Ê
DCC-28***
DCC-28***
ÊÊ
ËË
ÊÊ ËË ÊÊ
ËË
ÊÊ ËË
ËËËËËË
ÊÊ ËË
ËËËË
ÊÊ
ÊÊ
ÊÊ ËËËË ÊÊ
ËËËË
ACC**
ACC**
ACC**
ACC**
ÊÊ
ÊÊ ËËËË ÊÊ
ÊÊ ËËËË Ê
front side ËËË
* optional
** installed in ASU cabinet with 100 W version ËËË *** 100 W version only
Fig. 3-15 Push buttons and indications on the subassemblies inside the rack (1)
3-14 Ed. 01.04

DVOR 432
Key and test jack

PM1 test condition
ÊÊ
M1 modem operable
LGM
M5* comm. line subsystem
ÊÊ ÊÊ
and RCSE operable
Answ. modem occupies line
ÊÊ
PM1 Answ.
S1 DEE operable
M1 (M5*) S1
ÊÊ ÊÊ
FKS8 connector
Modem*
Modem*
Modem*
VAM*
ASU-INT
ÊÊ
* LGM28.8D1 opt.5
MSP-1
MSP-2
ÊÊ ÊÊ
--
--
CSL
LCP
DCC-05
ÊÊ
LC-CPU
ÊÊ Reset switch
ÊÊ ÊÊ
CSL
ÊÊ
TX1 ON, yellow
pushbutton manual TX1on
Ê ÊÊ pushbutton manual TX1off

MOD-110***
MOD-110P/
Ê ÊÊ
MOD-110
MOD-110
TX2 ON, yellow

DCC-MV
MSG-C
MSG-S
pushbutton manual TX2on
ÊÊ ÊÊ
SYN
CCP
pushbutton manual TX2off

BCD-Switch TEG
ÊÊ ÊÊ
ÊÊ
MON1, Monitor Fault, red
MON2, Monitor Fault, red
Switch Assoc./Indep.
ÊÊ
MOD-110***
ÊÊ ÊÊ
MOD-110P/
MOD-110
MOD-110
DCC-MV
MSG-C
MSG-S
ÊÊ
SYN
CCP
Ê ÊÊ
ÊÊ ÊÊ
Main Switch NAV, TX1, TX2 on/off
ËËË ËËË ÊÊ
ON
PMM F2 F1
OFF
Fuse F1 T1,0H 250V; F2 T6,3H 250V
ÊËËË
ÊËËË ËËË ÊÊ
NAV TX1 TX2
ÊËËË ËËË
ËËË
ÊÊ
ÊÊ
DC/DC ok (LED)
DCC-28***
DCC-28***
ÊËËË
ÊÊ ËËË ËËË
ËËË
ÊÊ
ÊÊ
ËËË ÊÊ
ACC
ÊÊ ËËË ÊÊ
ACC**
+54 V available (LED)

ACC**
ACC**
ACC**
test jack Uout
ËËË
ÊÊ ËËË ÊÊ
ÊÊ
R32, fine adjustment battery
charging voltage
ÊÊ Converter on/off
ËËË
ËËË
front side
* optional
** installed in ASU cabinet with 100 W version *** 100 W version only
Fig. 3-16 Push buttons and indications on the subassemblies inside the rack (2)
Ed. 01.04 3-15

DVOR 432
3.4 NORMAL OPERATION

3.4.1 Switching On
CAUTION
Never switch on the installation unless the antenna or an adequate dummy load is corĆ
rectly connected! Make sure that the switches on the AC/DC converter are in ON position.
After the alignment procedure is completed use the main switch NAV and then TX1 and/or TX2 on
PMM to switch on the transmitter. The indications on the control and status panel light up.
3.4.2 Change over from Remote to Local (on LCI)

To change over from Remote control to Local control use the key-lock switch of the local control
Interface (LCI).
3.4.3 Change Over to Maintenance Operation

Maintenance operation is only necessary when operational values have to be adjusted on the transĆ
mitter or when a maintenance check has to be performed. It is carried out using the maintenance conĆ
trol unit (PC).
3.4.4 Change over to Monitor Bypass

Bypass operation is only necessary when operational values have to be adjusted on the monitor. It
is carried out using the maintenance control unit (PC).
3.4.5 Acoustic Alarm

When one of the four control buttons of the LCI is pressed the acoustical alarm stops.
3.4.6 Monitoring ATIS or Voice

An earphone (600 Ohm) can be connected to a 3.5 mm jack on MSP-VD to listen to ATIS information.
(ATIS = Automatic Terminal Information System)
3.4.7 Functional Check of Indications

When the two middle buttons of the control buttons of the LCI are pressed simultaneously all indicaĆ
tions light up simultaneously and the buzzer sounds for optical and acoustical test purposes. Since
the monitor carries out normal checks of function and accuracy, the operation of the installation is
faultless when the liquid crystal display screen of the LCI indicates NORMAL. If however the display
screen shows WARNING or ALARM, a check of the installation via PC is possible if LOCAL operation
mode has been set by the key-lock switch on LCI.
3.4.8 Switching Off

Use the main switch NAV on PMM to switch off the installation. Switches TX1 and TX2 are used to
switch off transmitter 1 and/or 2. The indications on the LCI extinguish.
NOTE: The LRCI (LCP and modem) is neither switched off via the remote nor the local control
interface, so that it can receive switch-on commands as long as any of the switches TX1
and TX2 are on. Main switch NAV must not be off in this case.
3-16 Ed. 01.04

DVOR 432
CHAPTER 4
ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE
The alignment procedure of a DVOR including prerequisites is described in a step by step manner
starting with 4.1. The following list is a summary and also a detailed table of contents.
4.1 GENERAL PREREQUISITES

4.1.1 Operation via Personal Computer with ADRACS
4.1.2 Recommended Measurement Equipment
4.1.3 Installation
4.1.4 Special Setup for Alignment without Antenna System
4.2 FIRST SWITCHING ON

4.2.1 Status of the System
4.2.1.1 Special Jumper Settings before Start Up
4.2.2 Switching On
4.2.3 Preparing the Installation SITE with PC and ADRACS
4.2.4 Use of Main Menu Items and Activities Masks
4.2.5 Entering Station Configuration Data
4.3 MATCHING OF ANTENNAS

4.3.1 Mechanical Preadjustments
4.3.2 Test Set-Up
4.3.3 Transmitter Setting
4.3.4 Matching Procedure
4.4 CHECK OF DECOUPLING BETWEEN SIDEBAND ANTENNAS

4.4.1 Test Set-Up
4.4.3 Check of Decoupling
4.5 CALIBRATION OF MONITORS

4.5.1 Preparations
4.5.2 Calibration of Monitor 1
4.6 SETTING OF TRANSMITTERS AND MONITORS

4.6.1 Setting of TX1 with Monitor 1
4.6.3 Setting and Check of Monitor 2
4.7 RECORDING OF SIMULATOR ERROR CURVE

4.7.1 Error Curve of TX 1
4.8 SETTING OF MONITOR ALARM LIMITS

4.8.1 Monitor 1
4.8.2 Monitor 2
4.9 BATTERY MONITORING

4.10.1 Prerequisites
Ed. 01.04 4-1

DVOR 432
4.10.2 TX1 Main
4.10.3 TX2 Main
4.11 FLIGHT CHECK

4.11.2 Correction of TX1 and Monitor 1
4.11.3 Correction of TX2 with Monitor 2
4.11.4 Adjustment of Monitor 2 with TX1/TX2
4.11.5 Check of Monitor Alarm Limits
4.11.6 Normal Operation
4.12 RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN THE MONITOR DISPLAY OF THE RF LEVEL AND THE POWER
4-2 Ed. 01.04

DVOR 432
This chapter is a step by step field alignment procedure. It assumes that the transmitter cabinet has
been factory aligned and tested.

A standard or Laptop PC is used to perform locally the first alignment of the installation. The PC should
meet the following requirements:
- Processor Pentium 90 or better (IBM PC/AT compatible)
- 32 MB RAM, VGA adapter, CD-ROM drive
- min. 10 MB free disk space on HDD
- VGA color monitor (min. resolution 800 x 600 pixels)
- Control via mouse or comparable
- one serial interface connector (RS232)
- any 32-Bit version of Microsoft Windows operating system
Usually suitable PC equipment is already available at site. Otherwise it can be delivered on request
as an option. The ADRACS operating software for the different NAV systems must be installed on the
PC system. The adjustment of the transmitter and monitor parameters is performed via this PC using
the corresponding data window. First the ADRACS software should be installed on the available PC.
For installation procedure refer to Section 1.4 of Technical Manual ADRACS (Ref. No. 83140 55324).
4.1.2 Recommended Measuring Equipment

- 1 Multimeter
- 1 Scope (dual trace)
- 1 Thruline power meter with 1 W, 10 W and 100 W probes, range of frequency 108...118 MHz
- 1 Attenuator 20 dB, 1 W
- 1 Directional coupler
- 1 RF cable, approx. 8...10 m
- 1 RF cable, 30 m
- Various adapters N-TNC and measuring cables
- 1 Decoupling probe
- 1 Antenna Simulator (only available in Thales ATM testing area and in training center).
4.1.3 Installation
Before operation, the system must complete as follows:
- Transmitter and ASU cabinet, installed,
- Power supply, installed,
- Batteries, installed,
- Antenna system and
- Monitor dipole, installed and cabling complete.
- Mains voltage must be in accordance with assigned input voltage range of BCPS
(nominal 115 to 230 VAC).
- Cabinet has to be fully equipped with all plug-in units.
- Jumpers and DIP-FIX switches of the pertinent pc boards (refer also to 6.2.4) have to be in accorĆ
dance with the system version. To enable battery backup on specific pc boards refer to 4.2.1.1.
- The ADRACS software has been loaded to PC (refer to 4.1.1).
Ed. 01.04 4-3

DVOR 432
If the alignment is carried out with an antenna simulator instead of the antenna system proceed as
follows:
- Connect the 50 sideband-cables of ASU to the inputs of the Antenna-Simulator, whereby antenĆ
na output No. 1 is to be connected to socket W1 etc.
- Arrange simulator setup according to Fig. 4-4.
- Carry out the alignment of DVOR 432 transmitter and monitor as described in the following, how-
ever Sections 4.3, 4.4, 4.8.1.6, 4.8.1.9, 4.8.1.10 and 4.11 have to be omitted.
4-4 Ed. 01.04

DVOR 432
- Mains off
- Battery fuse switches open (used for emergency battery, battery fuse box, shelter)
- POWER-switches on BCPS (ACC modules, transmitter cabinet) in position OFF
- PMM: switches NAV, TX1, TX2 (transmitter cabinet) in position OFF

Individual jumpers have to be set before the first switching on. These are concerned with the enabling
of backup batteries for non volatile memory (LCP, MSP-VD/1,2, MSG-C/1,2) and the emergency
battery management (CSL). The location of jumpers is shown in section 6.2.4:
- LCP: Set jumper X36 (enabling backup battery for RTC).
- MSP-VD (MSP-D): Set jumper X7 on both boards (enabling backup battery).
- MSG-C: Set jumper X7 on both boards (enabling backup battery).
- CSL: Set jumper X18 (enabling cutoff for over discharge protection of emergency battery).
- CSL: Set jumper X22 (enabling automatic restore).
- CSL: Select minimal battery voltage with jumper X19,20,21 for standard over discharge protection.
4.2.2 Switching On
a) Connect PC serial interface connector (e.g. COM1) to connector Local PC on top of the cabinet
using an interface cable (zero modem cable).
b) Switch on mains and set POWER-switches of BCPS (ACC modules, cabinet) to position ON.
c) Close battery fuse switches (battery fuse box, inside shelter).
d) Set switches TX1/TX2 on PMM (cabinet, front side) to position ON.
e) Set main switch NAV on PMM (cabinet, front side) to position ON. During initialization of the LCP
a buzzer signal is set.
f) Switch to local control with the key-lock switch on the Local Control Interface (LCI).

a) Switch on the PC and run Windows operating system.
NOTE: Installation and use of the PC User Program is described in the Technical Manual
ADRACS (chapter 1, sect. 1.4 Installation, chapter 2, Functions), more details on set up
of NAV installation is given in section 1.5 of ADRACS manual. It is recommended to beĆ
come familiar with the menus of ADRACS before performing the first set up procedure.
b) Click Start button, select Programs, program group Adracs Remote Controlling, program Adracs
Remote Controlling Software. The 'Adracs - Select Configuration' window appears.
c) Click on configuration type 'STANDARD' or on predefined configuration type and confirm with OK
button. The Main Status window of ADRACS appears.
Ed. 01.04 4-5

DVOR 432
d) Perform login procedure at the PC. Acknowledge "User1, Level 5" with OK button.
e) Click on screen button Control in the Main Status window. The 'RC Management' window appears.
f) Click on pulldown menu File Transfer. Select command Copy PC File to RAM.
g) Copy configuration files (*.sit, *.lke, *.ptt, *.oio) from PC to the site.
Service activity only: Copy activities mask files for the first setup (*.mxn) from PC to site.
h) Click command Reset Site of menu File Transfer to activate entered files and data.
NOTE: The Adracs Remote Controlling Software is closed due to the reset. It has to be restarted
manually.
i) Run ADRACS again. Perform Login.
k) Click screen button Control in the Main Status window.
l) Select DateTimeREU in 'RC Management' window. Enter date and time in 'Date&Time REU' winĆ
dow and confirm with button SetNew. Close 'Date&Time REU' window. Proceed with 4.2.5 c) or
m)Logout from ADRACS by clicking on Logout button in 'RC Management' wndow and then click
on Exit button. The ADRACS application is closed.
4.2.4 Use of Main Menu Items and Activities Masks
From the Main Menu in ADRACS program the items Commands (C) and Activities (A) are used in the
alignment procedure of the first setup. Following activities masks are available, composed of different
data sets (listed in section 4.3 of Technical Manual ADRACS, Ref. No. 83140 55324):
- Configuration (CF) - Error Curve (EC)
- Antenna Adjustment (AA) - Alarm Limits M1 (AL1)
- Test Generator (TG) - Alarm Limits M2 (AL2)
- TX1 settings (TS) - Battery/BCPS (BAT)
- Monitor Calibration (MC) - Flight Check2 (FC)
a) Run Adracs Remote Controlling Software, see section 4.2.3, steps a) to c).
b) Perform login procedure at the PC.
c) Click on screen button select in the DVOR status field. The 'Detailed Status' window appears.
d) Select menu Commands. Click on commands Switch both TX ON and Set both MON Bypass ON.
e) Select menu Activities in Main menu and select activities mask 'Configuration'.
f) Enter station type, station frequency and identity morse code for both transmitters and monitors
in the TX1/2 and MON1/2 window.
g) Verify that the MON1/2-window single channel mode is off.
h) Select menu Commands. Click on command Switch both TX OFF.
4-6 Ed. 01.04

DVOR 432
Menu/
INSTRUCTION C: Commands
A: Activities Submenu

The following adjustments have to be carried out at all antennas

according to the station frequency.
4.3.1.1 Plate-Capacitor CA
a) Remove cover of antenna.
b) Read spacing of capacitor plates CA (Fig. 4-2) for the station
frequency from Fig. 4-1 (e.g. 8.2 mm for 115 MHz).
c) Manufacture an appropriate distance piece in a size equal to the
measure found above (e.g. file head of screw to fit).
d) Loosen lock nuts with spanner and set the plates to the proper
distance with the help of distance piece. The two plates should be
set approximately symmetrical to the frame.
e) Tighten capacitor plates with lock nuts. Then check their distance
once again.
4.3.1.2 Quartz Trimmer-Capacitor CTr

Remove antenna cover. Trimmer CTr is located in the center of the
antenna feed (Fig. 4-2). For adjustment, a screwdriver with a long blade
is necessary.
a) Turn CTr carefully (quartz trimmer!) counterclockwise to the stop.
b) Read the number of turns for CTr to adjust station frequency from
Fig. 4-1 (e.g. 11 turns for 115 MHz) and adjust CTr accordingly.
c) Replace cover and fasten it provisionally with 2 or 3 screws.
4.3.1.3 C5 of Matcher/Decoupling Module

(for sideband antennas only)
The matcher/decoupling module and cables are accessible through an
opening in the antenna pedestal, which is closed by a slide.
a) Turn C5 (Fig. 4-2) carefully counterclockwise to the stop.
b) Read the number of of turns for C5 to adjust the station frequency
from by means of Fig. 4-1 (e.g. 9.5 turns for 115 MHz) and adjust
C5 accordingly.
Ed. 01.04 4-7

DVOR 432
Menu/
4.3.2 Test Setup

Disconnect matcher/decoupling module at antenna1 and arrange test
setup according to Fig. 4-3. Connect measuring cable via 20 dB
attenuator to FORWARD-output of directional coupler.

a) Switch on TX1. C Switch TX1 On
b) Set carrier power to 10 W. A/TS T1 Carrier power

10 W
c) Set SB1 power to 0. A/TS T1 SBA power

level 0%
d) Set SB2 power to 0. T1 SBB power

level 0%
e) Switch off antenna rotation, and switch sideband antennas to 50 W

termination. Click 'ON/OFF' icon and select with change destination
and change group the 'ASU Test Commands' and then 'ASU test
no SB radiation'; click 'program TX-1'.

a) Set 'M1 AGC Adjustment' value to 'M1 RF Level' indication of 100 %. A/TS M1 AGC Adjustment
--,- %
If necessary, change 'M1 Digital.Ctrl.Attenuation'. -- dB
NOTE: Range of values: 2...255

b) Connect measuring cable to reflected output of directional coupler
at antenna1 and remove 20 dB attenuator at input of monitor 1.
NOTE: See test setup Fig. 4-3.
c) Set 'M1 RF Level' indication to a minimum by alternately adjusting
both plate capacitors CA (both in the same direction) and CTr of
antenna1.
REMARK: For this measurement the antenna cover must be put on proĆ
visionally and measuring personnel must have moved away
about 7 m from the antenna under test.
NOTE: Nominal value: less then 5 % (min. 26 dB matching).

d) Connect test setup to antenna 2. Reconnect matcher/decoupling
module to antenna 1 normally. Match antenna 2 and then all other
antennas including the center antenna in the same way.
e) Reconnect center antenna normally and remove test setup.
f) Switch off TX1. C Switch TX1 Off
4-8 Ed. 01.04

DVOR 432
Menu/
4.4 CHECK OF DECOUPLING BETWEEN SIDEBAND

ANTENNAS
4.4.1 Test Setup
Insert test probe into antenna 50 with probe cable running vertically to
counterpoise and then radially to center antenna. Connect it there to
measuring cable which has to be connected via 20 dB attenuator to
input of monitor 1.
a) Select blending function 1 (cw) in BSG-D subassembly.
NOTE: Close DIP-FIX switches S14 and S15.
b) Switch on TX1. C Switch TX1 On
c) Set CSB power to 0. A/TS T1 Carrier power

0.0 W
d) Set SB2 power to 0. A/TS T1 SBB power

level 0%
e) Set SB1 power to 20 %. A/TS T1 SBA power

level 20.0%
f) Set level of SB1 sine to 50.0 %. A/TS T1 SBA SINUS Blen-

ding 50.0%
g) Set level of SB1 cosine to 50.0 %. A/TS T1 SBA COSINUS

Blending 50.0%

a) Switch through to antenna 50. Choose in the 'TX Settings' window
the command 'T1 Start Antenna Single Step' and select 'Antenna 50'.
REMARK: Do not use this command when working with an antenna
simulator.
b) Set 'M1 AGC Adjustment' value to 'M1 RF Level' indication of 100 %. A/TS M1 AGC Adjustment
---,- %
NOTE: Range of value: 2...255

c) Switch through to antenna 49. Choose in the 'Antenna Adjustment
TX1' window the command 'T1 Start Antenna Single Step' and
select 'Antenna 49'.
d) Remove 20 dB attenuator from input of monitor 1. The indication
now displays the decoupling value. Reading should be <160 %
(min. 16 dB decoupling). If decoupling is lower (<16 dB)
check that C5 of matcher/decoupling module of antenna 50 is
properly set (see Fig. 4-1) or wether a cable connection is faulty.
NOTE: Measuring personnel must move away to center antenna.
Ed. 01.04 4-9

DVOR 432
Menu/
REMARK: If C5 of matcher/decoupling module has to be readĆ

justed, the matching of the neighboring antennas has to
be checked again and readjusted if necessary.
e) Insert test probe into antenna 49 and switch through to antenna 48 A/TS
by decrementing. 'M1 RF Level' indicates now decoupling of
antenna 49, which should be again < 160 %. Continue in this
manner until all sideband antennas have been checked.
g) Select blending function 4 of BSG-D subassembly.

NOTE: Open DIP-FIX-switches S14 and S15.
h) Remove test probe and connect inputs of monitors normally again.
4-10 Ed. 01.04

DVOR 432
Menu/

REMARK: This is done with the test generator on the CSL. Check position of
jumper X17: open = CVOR/DVOR
4.5.1 Preparations
b) Set test generator with BCD switch S6 (front of CSL) to position 0.

4.5.2.1 30 Hz AM Modulation Depth
a) Set calibration factor 'M1 Calibrate Mod. Depth 30Hz AM' to A/TG M1 Calibrate Mod.
'M1 TSG Mod. Depth 30Hz AM' indication of 30 %. depth 30 Hz AM
---,-%
b) Set test generator to position 8: 30Hz AM mod. depth has to be 0%.

c) Set test generator to position 0.
4.5.2.2 9960 Hz Modulation Depth
a) Set calibration factor 'M1 Calibrate Mod. Depth 9960Hz AM' to A/TG M1 Calibrate Mod.
'M1 TSG Mod. Depth 9960Hz AM' indication of 30 %. depth 9960 Hz
---,-%
b) Set test generator to pos. 9: 9960 Hz AM mod. depth has to be 0%.

4.5.2.3 30 Hz FM Modulation Index
a) Set calibration factor 'M1 Calibrate Mod. Index 30Hz FM' to A/TG M1 Calibrate Mod.
'M1 TSG Mod. Index 30Hz FM' indication of 16. Index 30 Hz FM
---
b) Set test generator to position A: 30 Hz FM Mod. Index has to be 15.

Set test generator to position B: 30 Hz FM Mod. Index has to be 17.
Set test generator to position C: 30 Hz FM Mod. Index has to be 25.
4.5.2.4 Azimuth
a) Set 'M1 Calibrate Azimuth' to 'M1 TSG Azimuth' indication of 0. A/TG M1 Calibrate Azimuth
---
b) Set test generator to position 0: M1 TSG Azimuth has to be 0°.

Set test generator to position 1: M1 TSG Azimuth has to be 45°.
Ed. 01.04 4-11

DVOR 432
Menu/

a) Repeat section 4.5.2 for monitor 2.
b) Switch off TX1/2. C Switch both TX Off
4-12 Ed. 01.04

DVOR 432
Menu/

4.6.1.1 Basic Settings
a) Connect the power meter to the CSB output.
c) Set 30 Hz AM mod. depth to 0 %. A/TS T1 Mod. Depth

30Hz AM 0 %
d) Set identity mod. depth to 0 %. A/TS T1 Mod. Depth

Identity 0 %
e) Set voice mod. depth to 0 %. A/TS T1 Mod. Depth Voice

0%
f) Set CSB power to nominal value (30 W or up to 100 W). A/TS T1 Carrier Power
Measure the power. ---,- W
NOTE: If there is a difference between the nominal power and the meaĆ
sured power adjust the power by means of R1 of the Control CouĆ
pler (CCP-D), refer to Fig. 4-5 (BP-T,X16).
g) Preset levels of blending functions (sine and cosine) for SB1

and SB2:
- SB1-S A/TS T1 SBA SINUS Blen-

ding --,-%
- SB1-C A/TS T1 SBA COSINUS
Blending --,-%
- SB2-S A/TS T1 SBB SINUS Blen-
ding --,-%
- SB2-C A/TS T1 SBB COSINUS
Blending --,-%
NOTE: Up to 50 W: 30 %, with 100 W: 50 %.

h) Set SB1- and SB2-power to 40 %:
- SB1 A/TS T1 SBA Power Level

40 %
- SB2 A/TS T1 SBB Power Level
40 %
i) Switch off TX1. C Switch TX1 Off
j) Disconnect the power meter.
Ed. 01.04 4-13

DVOR 432
Menu/
4.6.1.2 RF Phasing (Carrier Sideband)

---,- %
c) Select single-channel mode for monitor 1 (9960 Hz AM AM-Det.) A/TS M1 Single Channel
9960 Hz AM AM-Det
d) Connect oscilloscope to P16 of MSP-VD/1 (see Fig. 4-5)

(comp.-signal).
NOTE: Horizontal deflection: 5 ms/cm.
e) Shift SBA RF phase in bigger steps at first, then in smaller steps A/TS T1 SBA RF Phase
for a max. 9960 Hz mod. depth reading. At the same time check --- °
on scope that max. 9960 Hz mod. depth coincides roughly with
min. distortion mod. depth on 9960 Hz signal.
NOTE: Range of values: 0...359.
f) Switch off single-channel mode of monitor 1. A/TS M1 Single Channel
OFF
4.6.1.3 Equality Check of Levels of Blending Signals

a) Measure levels of the demodulated blending signals using thescope
at the following test points on TEST card of ASU:
1b5 : SB1-S
1b7 : SB1-C
1b6 : SB2-S
1b8 : SB2-C
b) If difference of levels is greater than 5 % correct levels using the
of following commands:

ding --,-%
Blending --,-%
- SB2-S
Blending --,-%
NOTE: Range of values: 0...99.5

c) If corrections in b) were necessary, repeat RF phasing (4.6.1.2).

a) Adjust all levels of blending signals (set in 4.6.1.1 resp. 4.6.1.3) by a A/TS T1 Alignment all
constant factor for a 30 % reading of the 9960 Hz AM mod. depth. Blending levels
- --,-%
4-14 Ed. 01.04

DVOR 432
Menu/
NOTE: Range of values: 80.0...120.0

Factor= 30 % x (100 % / Indication of window 2)
REMARK: Read out and remember the individual levels of the blending signals
for later check.
b) Minimize SB1 power: Connect scope to 1b5 and 1b7 on TEST A/TS T1 SBA Power Level
card in ASU. Reduce SB1-power until clipping of peaks of sinus --,-%
signal. Then increase SB1 power by 5 % (relative).
NOTE: Range of values: 0...99.5, note down value!
c) Minimize SB2 power: Connect scope to 1b6 and 1b8 on A/TS T1 SBB Power Level
TEST card and perform as described in b). --,-%
NOTE: Range of value: 0...99.5, note down value!

a) Set 'T1 Mod. Depth 30 Hz AM' so that 'M1 Mod. Depth 30 Hz AM' A/TS T1 Mod. Depth
becomes 30 %. 30 Hz AM --,-%
4.6.1.6 Preadjustment of Azimuth

a) Set phase reference for the 30 Hz FM signal to antenna 1. A/TS T1 Start Antenna
Normal Operation
Antenna-1
b) Choose azimuth of transmitter to obtain the azimuth reading of the T1 Azimuth alignment
monitor dipole. ---,-°
NOTE: Range of values: 0...359.9 (assume 0, if working with simulator

test-set-up).
4.6.1.7 Identity- and Voice-Adjustment

a) Set identity mod. depth to e.g. 10 %. A/TS T1 Mod. Depth
Identity AM --,- %
NOTE: Range of values: 0...20.0.

b) If applicable set voice mod. depth to e.g. 20 %. A/TS T1 Mod. Depth Voice
AM --,- %

c) Switch off TX1. C Switch TX1 Off
Ed. 01.04 4-15

DVOR 432
Menu/

b) Switch over to TX2 C Set TX2 Aerial
Set TX2 in the same way as described for TX1 in 4.6.1. Continue to use A/TS TX settings
monitor 1 for monitor indications. Therefore omit 4.6.1.2 b) (do not
change the AGC value of monitor 1 again), but check that the RF level
indication is 100±5 %. Use activity mask A/TS 'TX Settings'.
4.6.3 Setting and Check of Monitor2
4.6.3.1 Monitor 2 with TX1 on Aerial
NOTE: TX1 radiating.
Switch on TX1. C Switch TX1 On
Switch over to TX1 C Set TX1 Aerial
a) RF level
Set 'M2 AGC Adjustment' value to 'M2 RF Level' indication of 100%. A/MC M2 AGC Adjustment
--,- %
b) 30 Hz AM mod. depth A/MC M2āMod.Depth

Check the 'M2 Mod. Depth 30 Hz AM' reading. ā30Hz AM
NOTE: Use window 'MON2 Measurement. Nominal value: 30.0 ±1.0 %

c) Subcarrier A/MC
ca) Check the 'M2 Mod. Depth 9960 Hz AM' reading.
NOTE: Use window 'MON2 Measurement'. Nominal value: 30.0 ±1.0 %
cb) Check the 'M2 Mod. Index 30 Hz FM' reading.
NOTE: Use window 'MON2 Measurement'. Nominal value: 16.0 ±0.5 %
d) Azimuth A/MC
Check the 'M2 Azimuth' reading.
NOTE: Use window 'MON2 Measurement'.
Nominal value: same as in 4.6.1.6b), ±0.2
REMARK: If monitor 1 and 2 have not been calibrated according to 4.5

calibrate values of b), c) and d) of monitor 2 for the same indiĆ
cations as described in 4.5.2 to 4.5.2.4c) for monitor 1.

Check following monitor 2 indications:

a) RF level. A/MC M2 RF-Level
NOTE: Nominal value: 100 ±5 %.
4-16 Ed. 01.04

DVOR 432
Menu/
b) 30 Hz AM mod. depth. A/MC M2 Mod. Depth 30Hz

AM
NOTE: Nominal value: 30.0 ±1.0 %.

c) 9960 Hz mod. depth. A/MC M2 Mod. Depth 9960
Hz AM

d) 30 Hz FM mod. index. A/MC M2 Mod. Index 30Hz
FM

e) Azimuth A/MC M2 AZIMUTH
NOTE: Same as in 4.6.1.6b), ±0.2 %.

Ed. 01.04 4-17

DVOR 432
Menu/
4.7 RECORDING OF SIMULATOR-ERROR-CURVE

4.7.1 Error Curve of TX1
b) Note down 'T1 Azimuth Alignment' value. A/EC
NOTE: Important for h)

c) Shift 'T1 Azimuth Alignment' for a 'M1 Azimuth' reading of 000.0° A/EC T1āAzimuthāalignment
---,-°
NOTE: Range of value: 0...359.9

d) Record in test sheet (Fig. 4-6) reading of 'M1 Azimuth' (e.g. 0.0°)
as 1st value.
e) Set phase reference for the 30 Hz FM signal to antenna 3 and re- A/EC T1 Start Antenna
cord reading of 'M1 Azimuth' as 2nd value in test sheet. Normal Operation
Antenna-3
f) By incrementing twice select next but one antenna as 30 Hz phase

reference and record azimuth readings of 'M1 Azimuth'. Continue
this way until all 25 measurement values have been recorded. The
measured values have to increment in steps of 14.4°. Record the
differences from these nominal values in the error column.
A typical error spread is <±0.4°.
g) Set phase reference for the 30 Hz FM signal to antenna1. A/EC T1 Start Antenna
Normal Operation
h) Key in azimuth value noted down in in b) again. A/EC T1āAzimuthāalignment

---,-°

Perform an error curve measurement for TX2 in the same way as for
TX1 (4.7.1).
4-18 Ed. 01.04

DVOR 432
Menu/

4.8.1 Monitor 1
4.8.1.1 Azimuth
a) Choose azimuth value 'M1 Azimuth'. A/AL1 Alarm Limits M1
(equal to azimuth value of monitor dipole).
b) Upper limit: Add 1.0° to 'M1 Azimuth' reading and key in this value. A/AL1 M1 Azimuth Upper
Limit ---,- °
c) Lower limit: Subtract 1.0° from 'M1 Azimuth' reading and key in A/AL1 M1 Azimuth Lower
this value. Limit ---,- °
NOTE: Range of values: 0...359.9;

If during flight check azimuth of transmitters has to be changed,
these azimuth alarm limits have to be readjusted.
4.8.1.2 RF-Level
a) Upper limit, e.g. 123 %. A/AL1 M1 RF Level Upper
Limit --- %
b) Lower limit, e.g. 71 %. A/AL1 M1 RF Level Lower

Limit --- %
NOTE: Range of values: Upper Limit 100...150, Lower Limit 50...100.
4.8.1.3 30 Hz AM Signal
a) Upper limit, e.g. 34.5 %. A/AL1 M1 Mod. Depth 30 Hz
AM UL --,- %
b) Lower limit, e.g. 25.5 %. A/AL1 M1 Mod. Depth 30 Hz

AM LL --,- %
4.8.1.4 9960 Hz Signal

a) Upper limit, e.g. 34.5 %. A/AL1 M1 Mod. Depth 9960
Hz AM UL --,- %
b) Lower limit, e.g. 25.5 %. A/AL1 M1 Mod. Depth 9960

Hz AM LL --,- %
4.8.1.5 30 Hz FM Signal
a) Upper limit, e.g. 18.4. A/AL1 M1 Mod. Index 30 Hz
FM UL --,-
b) Lower limit, e.g. 13.6. A/AL1 M1 Mod. Index 30 Hz

FM LL --,-
Ed. 01.04 4-19

DVOR 432
Menu/
4.8.1.6 RF Phase
a) Choose RF phase 'T1 RF-Phase Measurement'. A/AL1
b) Upper limit: Add 20° to 'T1 RF-Phase Measurement' reading A/AL1 T1 RF Phase Upper
and key in this value. Limit --- °
c) Lower limit: Subtract 20° from 'T1 RF-Phase Measurement' reading A/AL1 T1 RF Phase Lower
4.8.1.7 9960 Hz Distortion

a) Choose 'M1 Distortion on 9960 Hz AM' reading. A/AL1
b) Upper limit: Multiply 'M1 Distortion on 9960 Hz AM' reading A/AL1 M1 Distortion on
by 1.2 and key in this value, however max. 60 %. 9960 Hz UL --,-%

c) Lower limit: Key in 0.0 %. A/AL1 M1 Distortion on
9960 Hz LL 0%
4.8.1.8 30 Hz FM Distortion
a) Choose 'M1 Distortion on 30 Hz FM' reading. A/AL1
b) Limit: Add 2 % to 'M1 Distortion on 30 Hz FM' reading and key in A/AL1 M1 Distortion on 30
this value as upper limit, however max. 5 %. Hz FM UL --,- %
4.8.1.9 Distortion of SSB Signal (ME 10 kHz)

a) Choose 'M1 Distortion on det. LSB' reading. A/AL1
b) Upper limit: Add 3 % to 'M1 Distortion on det. LSB' reading A/AL1 M1 Dist. on det. LSB
and key in this value, however max. 15 %. UL --,- %
c) Lower limit: Key in half value of 'M1 Distortion on det. LSB' A/AL1 M1 Dist. on det. LSB
reading . LL --,- %
NOTE: Range of values: 0... 99.9
4.8.1.10 Distortion Difference Signal (SB MON)

a) Choose 'M1 Distortion on det. USB-LSB' reading. A/AL1
b) Upper limit: Add 20 % to indication and key in this value, A/AL1 M1 Dist. on det. USB
however max. 80 %. -LSB UL --,-%

c) Lower limit: Key in 0.0 %. A/AL1 M1 Dist. on det. USB
-LSB LL 0 %
4-20 Ed. 01.04

DVOR 432
Menu/
4.8.1.11 Identity AM Signal

a) Upper limit, e.g. 11.5 %. A/AL1 M1 Mod. Depth Iden-
tity AM UL --,- %
b) Lower limit, e.g. 8.5 %. A/AL1 M1 Mod. Depth Iden-

tity AM LL --,- %
4.8.1.12 Alarm Delay

Set delay to e.g. 30 s. A/AL1 M1 Alarm Delay
--- s
4.8.2 Monitor 2
Set alarm limits for monitor 2 in the same way as described for A/AL2 Alarm Limits M2
monitor 1 in section 4.8.1. Use Activity mask A/AL2 'Alarm Limits M2'.

NOTE: The floating battery must be installed and connected.
Use activities mask 'BCPS/BAT' A/BAT
a) Enter installed battery capacity. A/BAT Installed Batt. Capa

city ---.- Ah
b) When the Battery is fully charged, set 'Set Batt. Charge Level' to A/BAT Set Batt. Charge
the same value (Installed Capacity = Charge Level). Level ---.- Ah
NOTE: Divide Installed Capacity by 500 Ah. The battery is fully charged,
when 'battery current' indicates this value.
c) Check alarm limits (UL and LL) for battery half voltage, battery full A/BAT Batt. half Voltage UL
voltage and battery current. Batt. half Voltage LL
Batt. full Voltage UL
Batt. full Voltage LL
Batt. Current UL/LL
Ed. 01.04 4-21

DVOR 432
Menu/

a) Equipment is aligned according to Sections 4.1 to 4.8.
b) Mains and DC supply are switched on and PC login procedure has
been executed.
c) Carry out section 4.10.2 for TX1 as MAIN or alternatively section
4.10.3 for TX2 as MAIN.
4.10.2 TX1 Main

Set TX1 to Aerial. C Set TX1 Aerial
b) Select function key 'Configuration' and check that no MONITOR

ALARM or BITE WARNING is on. Otherwise click on the BITE
WARNING field (TX1) to get the list 'Checks on NAV-System' which
indicates all Alarms and Warnings.
NOTE: Allow system approx. 30 s for initialization.
c) Monitor 1/2 bypass OFF. C Set both MON By-
pass off
d) Simulate monitor 1 and 2 alarm by e.g. disconnecting monitor

inputs and check that after selected alarm delay TX1 is switched
off and TX2 is switched on. Remove monitor alarm conditions
immediately after change over.
e) Check that no MONITOR ALARM or BITE WARNING is on, otherwise
click on the BITE WARNING field (TX2) to get the list 'Checks on
NAV-System' which indicates all Alarms and Warnings. Locate and
eliminate fault.
f) Simulate monitor alarms again and check that after selected alarm
delay TX2 is switched off. Afterwards remove alarm conditions
again.
NOTE: Both TX must be off now.
g) Switch on TX1. C Switch TX1 On
h) Monitor 1/2 bypass OFF. C Set both MON By-

pass off
NOTE: Check that NORMAL indication is on.
4.10.3 TX2 Main

Carry out 4.10.2 for TX2.
4-22 Ed. 01.04

DVOR 432
Menu/
4.11 FLIGHT CHECK

The following describes a standard flight-check-procedure. However
range and sequence of this procedure may vary depending on the
individual flight check crew.
a) System has been out of operation:
aa) Switch on all AC/DC-Converter
ab) Switch on fuse switches of batteries
ac) Switch on switches TX1/TX2 and NAV on PMM
ad) Switch on TX1/2 C Switch both TX On
b) System has been in NORMAL operation:

Switch on monitor bypass C Set both MON By-
pass on

NOTE: TX1 must be on "AERIAL", and both "MONITOR BYPASS" must be "ON".
PC is connected.

a) Check 30 Hz mod. depth indication: 'M1 Mod. Depth 30 Hz AM'
b) Change 30 Hz AM mod. depth for desired value according to A/FC T1 Mod. Depth 30Hz
announcement of Flight Check Engineer. AM --,- %
NOTE: Range of values: 0...40. Note value !

c) Recalibrate 30 Hz mod. depth indication of monitor 1 for 30 %. A/MC M1 Calibrate Mod.
(Recommendation: Perform this after flight check) Depth 30 Hz AM
--,- %
4.11.2.2 9960 Hz Mod. Depth

a) In case of required mod. depth increase: Increase SB1+SB2 power A/FC T1 Alignment
so that the signal is not limited (see also 4.6.1.4 b), leaving a margin SBA+SBB Power
for adjustments in c) and d) ---,- %
NOTE: Omit a) in case of mod. depth decrease.

b) Check 9960Hz mod. depth indication 'M1 Mod. Depth 9960Hz AM'.
c) Change 9960 Hz mod. depth for desired value according to A/FC T1 Alignment all
announcement of Flight Check Engineer as described in Blending Levels
section 4.6.1.4. ---,- %
d) Recalibrate 9960 Hz mod. depth indication of monitor1 for 30 % A/MC M1 Calibrate Mod.
(Recommendation: Perform this after flight check) Depth 9960 Hz
---,- %
Ed. 01.04 4-23

DVOR 432
Menu/
4.11.2.3 Azimuth
a) Check azimuth indication: 'M1 Azimuth'
b) Change azimuth for desired value according to announcement of A/FC T1 Azimuth Align-
Flight Check Engineer. Record azimuth indication. ment ---,- °
NOTE: Range of values: 0...359.9. Note new value.

c) Add 1.0° to azimuth indication and key in this value as upper limit. A/AL1 M1 Azimuth Upper
(Recommendation: Perform this after flight check) Limit ---,- °
d) Subtract 1.0° from azimuth indication and key in this value as A/AL1 M1 Azimuth Lower
lower limit (Recommendation: Perform this after flight check). Limit ---,- °
4.11.2.4 Identity Modulation Depth

a) Check Ident. mod depth indication: 'M1 Mod. Depth Identity AM'
b) Change Ident. mod. depth for desired value according to A/FC T1 Mod. Depth Iden-
announcement of Flight Check Engineer. tity AM --,- %

c) Recalibrate 'Mod. Depth Identity AM' indication for 10 % for both A/MC M1 Calibrate Mod.
monitors. Depth Ident.
M2 Calibrate Mod.
Depth Ident.
4.11.2.5 Voice Modulation Depth

Change voice mod. depth for desired value according to announcement A/FC T1 Mod. Depth
of Flight Check Engineer. Voice AM --,- %

Correct TX2 in the same way as described for TX1 in section 4.11.1, A/FC
however set the 30 Hz AM and 9960 Hz mod. depth, 30 Hz FM mod.
index, azimuth, identity and voice mod. depth of TX2 in order to obtain
the same monitor indications as for TX1. Later, the settings of TX2
have to be confirmed by flight check.
NOTE: Switch off TX1 and then Switch on TX2. Verify that both MONITOR
BYPASS are on.

Correct monitor 2 in the same way as described for monitor1 in 4.11.2 A/MC
and 4.11.3, but do not change transmitter adjustments. Use activity mask A/AL2
A/MC 'Monitor Calibration' and A/AL2 'Alarm Limits M2'.
a) The monitor alarm limits can be checked either by means of TX1
or TX2. The following describes this check with TX1 as main TX.
b) Change of alarm limits - if necessary - can be carried out as
described in Section 4.8.
4-24 Ed. 01.04

DVOR 432
Menu/
4.11.5.1 Azimuth Alarm

a) Check azimuth indication 'M1 Azimuth' and 'M2 Azimuth'. A/FC
Remember this values and azimuth value of transmitter.
b) Upper limit:
Change remembered azimuth value by approx. +1° (old value +1) A/FC T1 Azimuth Align-
until both monitors alarm. ment ---,- °
c) Lower limit:
Change remembered azimuth value by approx. -1° (old value -1) A/FC T1 Azimuth Align-
until bothmonitors alarm. ment ---,- °

d) After check by Flight Check Engineer key in remembered azimuth
value again, see a).
4.11.5.2 30 Hz AM Modulation Depth Alarm

a) Check 30 Hz AM mod. depth indication 'M1 Mod. Depth 30 Hz AM' A/FC
and 'M2 Mod. Depth 30 Hz AM'.
b) Remember 30 HzAM mod. depth value of 'T1 Mod. Depth 30Hz AM'.
c) Reduce 30 Hz mod. depth by approx. 15% until both monitors alarm. A/FC T1 Mod.Depth 30 Hz
AM --,- %

d) After check by Flight Check Engineer key in recorded value of b) A/FC T1 Mod.Depth 30 Hz
again AM --,- %
4.11.5.3 9960 Hz Modulation Depth Alarm

a) Check 9960 Hz mod. depth indication 'M1 Mod. Depth 9960 Hz AM' A/FC
and 'M2 Mod. Depth 9960 Hz AM'
b) Remember levels of blending signals 'T1 SBA Sinus Blending',
'T1 SBA Cosinus Blending', 'T1 SBB Sinus Blending', 'T1 SBB
Cosinus Blending'.
c) Reduce 9960 Hz mod. depth until both monitors alarm by a A/FC T1 Alignment all
multiplier (approx. 85 %) blending levels --,-
NOTE: Range of values: 80.0...120.0. Key in first 88.0 and then 99.0 and
increment down.
d) Upon completion of check by the Flight Check Engineer key in A/FC T1 SBA sinus blen-
recorded value of b) again. ding --,-%
T1 SBA cosinus blen-
ding --,-%
T1 SBB sinus blen-
ding --,-%
T1 SBB cosinus blen-
ding --,-%
Ed. 01.04 4-25

DVOR 432
Menu/

a) TX1 Main C Set TX1 Aerial
or or
TX2 Main C Set TX2 Aerial
b) Switch off Standby TX2 C Switch TX2 Off

or or
Switch off Standby TX1 C Switch TX1 off
c) Switch off Bypass Monitor 1. C Set MON1 Bypass off
Switch off Bypass Monitor 2. C Set MON2 Bypass off
d) Switch to REMOTE with key-lock switch on the Local Control

Interface.
4-26 Ed. 01.04

DVOR 432
CTr C5 CA
(Rotations) [mm]
14
26 13
24 12
22 11
CA
Loop
20 10
18 9
16 8
14 7
12 6
CTr
10 5 Matching transformer
8 4
C5
6 3 matcher/decoupling module
4 2
2 1
0
108.0 108.5 109.0 109.5 110.0 110.5 111.0 111.5 112.0 112.5 113.0 113.5 114.0 114.5 115.0 115.5 116.0 116.5 117.0 117.5 118.0 118.5 119.0 MHz
Fig. 4-1 Setting characteristics for DVOR-antenna

Antenna dome, top view Matcher/Decoupling module
Lock nuts
X2
C5 to antenna
CA
CTr
CA
Spacing a X4* X3*
X1
* decoupling module only
Fig. 4-2 Position of capacitors CA, CTr (antenna dome), C5 (matcher/decoupling module)
Ed. 01.04 4-27

DVOR 432
Antenna
Test cable (10m)
Supply cable for middle antenna

Directional coupler
Return Forward
Test cable (30 m)
Decoupling
module x)
10 W
20 dB
CSB
Monitor 1 TX
x) with SB antennas only
Fig. 4-3 Test setup for matching measurements for DVOR-antenna

1...50
ASU PMC Simulator Transmitter

cabinet
CSB TEST SB Monitor

(= 8 dBm) O/P (= 0 dBm) I/P
R1
(= 10 dB)
R3 (50 W) R2
Directional
coupler
20 dB
3-dB
Fig. 4-4 Simulator test setup for DVOR
4-28 Ed. 01.04

DVOR 432

ÊÊ ÊÊ
Position of measurement
ÊÊ X94 X93 X92
X87
X80
X86 X79
X85
X78
X82
ÊÊ
ÊÊ ÊÊ
point P16 on MSP-VD control line BCPS
X99 X98 X97 X96 X77 X76 X84
X73
front BP-C X74
ÊÊ ÊÊ
X83
V2 X95 -3 - 1
X72 X71 -4 - 2
V3
ÊÊ ÊÊ
V1 X7
X22 X8
ÊÊ BP-T X71
X70 X84
X81 ÊÊ
Ê Ê
X83
(TX1) X72
X85 X82
Ê CA-100/1*
Ê CCP-D
Probe
ÊÊ X16
X80 ÊÊ
ÊÊ ÊÊ
R1
X70
P16 BP-T X71 X84
X81
ÊÊ ÊÊ
X83
X72
(TX2) X85 X82
ÊÊ X16
X80 ÊÊ
ÊÊ ÊÊ
not assembled on
MSP-VD, Ref. No. 83135 22301
PMM
NAV, TX1, TX2

Ê Ê
ÊÊ ÊÊ
rear BP-DC
CA-100/2*
Ê Ê
ÊÊ ÊÊ
ÊÊ ÊÊ
ÊÊ Battery and power supply connection
ÊÊ
Ê Ê
ÊÊ ÊÊ
control line BCPS
BP-BCPS
*Version 100 W
Fig. 4-5 Transmitter rack, rear side, potentiometers on CCP-D
Ed. 01.04 4-29

DVOR 432
Test log (sample)
TX1 TX2
Ant. No. Nom./° Act./° Error/° Act./° Error/°
(Nom.-Act.) (Nom.-Act.)
1 0,0°
3 14,4°
5 28,8°
7 43,2°
9 57,6°
11 72,0°
13 86,4°
15 100,8°
17 115,2°
19 129,6°
21 144,0°
23 158,4°
25 172,8°
27 187,2°
29 201,6°
31 216,0°
33 230,4°
35 244,8°
37 259,2°
39 273,6°
41 288,0°
43 302,4°
45 316,8°
47 331,2°
49 345,6°
Error spread TX1: TX2:
Fig. 4-6 Test log for simulator fault plot
4-30 Ed. 01.04

DVOR 432
4.12 RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN THE MONITOR DISPLAY OF
THE RF LEVEL AND THE POWER
The CSB output power is displayed by the monitor as the RF level. This display does not correspond
to the direct power but is a voltage display. The power must be converted to a voltage in order to be
able to set an alarm limit, e.g. ±20 % power change.
dB= 10 log P1/P2
V e.g. alarm limit for -20 % power change

dB =10 log P1/P2 ; P1 = 0.8 P2
dB =10 log 0.8 P2/P2
dB =10 log 0.8
dB =-0.9691
V e.g. alarm limit for +20 % power change

dB =10 log P1/P2 ; P1=1.2 P2
dB =10 log 1.2 P2/P2
dB =10 log 1.2
dB = 0.7918
Conversion of power change to a voltage change (U is used instead of V)
dB= 10 log P1/P2 ; P1= U12/R ; P2= U22/R (U is according to the RF-level)
dB = 10 log (U12/R) / (U22/R)
dB = 10 log U12/U22
dB = 20 log U1/U2
dB/20= log U1/U2
10dB/20= U1/U2
U 1= U2 x 10dB/20
If the above and below formulae are combined the result is as follows:
U1=U2 x 100.5 log P1 / P2
The conversion yields the following relationship: U12/U22 = P1/P2

These formulae can be converted to determine the associated power change from the monitor display
of the RF level.
P 1= P2 x 102 log U1 / U2
Ed. 01.04 4-31

DVOR 432
4-32 Ed. 01.04

DVOR 432
Operation and Maintenance Maintenance
CHAPTER 5
MAINTENANCE
5.1 GENERAL
There are two basic types of maintenance, namely periodic maintenance and normal maintenance.
It is essential to ensure that the radiated signals remain within the fixed tolerances at all times after
the navigation system has been handed over for service to air traffic. With this aim in mind, ICAO recĆ
ommends verifying the most important signal parameters of the ground station within the framework
of periodic maintenance. In Navaids 400, all the main parameters are maintained at the preset values
throughout the entire life of the system by means of a microprocessor controlled transmitter, so that
drift as a result of ageing should not normally occur. In addition, the radiated signals are checked by
two high-precision microprocessor controlled monitors. These prevent fault signals from being
emitted by either switching over to the standby transmitter or shutting down the system completely.
Since, moreover, no parts which are subject to mechanical wear and tear are used, the periodic mainĆ
tenance intervals can be made longer than usual and the number of measurements restricted to a
minimum. Due to the measurement facilities which are integrated in the system, only a few external
instruments are required. In addition to the periodic maintenance tasks, there are a few activities of
normal maintenance which should be performed as and when necessary.
5.2 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
NOTE: The items marked with an asterisk (*) are normally performed continuously via a conĆ
nected RMMC.
Compare also measuring values with those of recorded data (refer to section 5.2.4)
Handling with subassemblies regard instructions in section 5.2.1.
We recommend performing the maintenance activities listed in the table below once every month or
six months. The following measuring instruments are required for this:
- Personal Computer (Laptop or standard PC; used for maintenance on site)
- Headphones (600 ohms, 3.5 mm plug; for station identification)
- Portable field dipole
- RF terminating resistor (50 ohms, 1 W)
- Multimeter
- Battery maintenance equipment (acidimeter, acid syringe, areometer, thermometer, funnel).
No. Monthly maintenance
1 Check system status/visual inspection (refer to 5.2.2)
2 Check station frequency of former master transmitter*
3 Check station identification of former master transmitter*
4 Check settings of both transmitters and monitors*
5 Check measured values of former master transmitter and monitors*
7 Check switch over function by simulating monitor alarm and changing master transmitter*
8 Check station frequency of new master transmitter*
9 Check station identification of new master transmitter*
10 Check measured values of new master transmitter and monitors*
Additional six-monthly maintenance

6 Check ground error curve of former master transmitter
11 Check ground error curve of new master transmitter
12 Check remote control system (line loss)*
13 Check lead batteries/visual inspection (refer also to section 5.3.2 and 5.4, if need be)
14 Check battery function by simulating a power failure*
15 Clean all equipment thoroughly (refer to 5.2.3)
Ed. 01.04 5-1

DVOR 432
Maintenance Operation and Maintenance
5.2.1 Elimination of Static Charges
A grounding strip with a large cross-sectional area is connected between the shelter grounding terĆ
minal, the equipment racks and the worktable to act as the system ground and to eliminate electroĆ
static charges. It is firmly connected to the table and a grounding bus on the working surface. This
system ground should not be connected to either the mains protective ground conductor or to housĆ
ings and grounds of external consumers, i.e. consumers not associated with the worktable, except
at the potential equalization bus for the overall installation. The protective ground wire offered with
mains cable or plug connections is not suitable for potential equalization of equipment on a worktable.
Depending on local circumstances, it can carry quite high RF interference voltages. Mains-supplied
equipment, power supplies and test equipment should be connected via two-wire cables and two-
pin plugs.
For measures to be taken with respect to components sensitive to electricostatic charging (MOS, Low
Power Schottky) please refer to the customer service documentation of the manufacturer. If an emĆ
ployee is required to handle subassemblies for transport purposes, he should place both hands flat
on a grounded surface beforehand (e.g. on the ground bus of the work table). The module can be
picked up by its insulator immediately following this potential equalization. It is safer to avoid touching
the terminals. Only remove short-circuit links where absolutely necessary. Place printed circuit
boards only on tables with a conductive, grounded working surface. Leave individual subassemblies
in the antistatic plastic bags for as long as possible.
5.2.2 Damage check
The following system parts have to be checked visually for entirety:
- shelter
- counterpoise
- antenna radomes
- monitor dipole, monitor mast and cable
- fence around the station
- tight fitting of all RF cable connections (internal and external).
- tight fitting of all screwed connections (internal and external, electrical and mechanical).
5.2.3 Cleaning
CAUTION
Cleaning aids, such as brushes and dusters, must be made of antistatic material. See also
the instructions in Section 5.2.1.
- Shelter
Brushes, dusters and a vacuum cleaner should be used to clean the transmitter rack and the rack
for the battery-charged power supply. The transmitter room should not be cleaned with a broom,
but rather using a vacuum cleaner. The floor should be washed regularly every 6 month. The deterĆ
gent should be added in small quantities only to the water; no aggressive cleaning agents should
be used. Floor cleaning agents should be avoided, since these have the same effect as a dielectric
and encourage the build-up of static charges.
5-2 Ed. 01.04

DVOR 432
If the floor covering is made of a conductive material, then similarly only those cleaning agents exĆ
pressly recommended by the manufacturer of the floor covering should be used.
The air filters of the fans, ventilation openings or air conditioners in the shelter should be checked
from time to time in accordance with the volume of dirt which accumulates at the particular location.
The filters should be replaced by new ones before they become clogged. If no new filters are availĆ
able, the dirt may - as an exceptional measure - be banged out of the old filter to permit the filter
to be re-used. Damaged filters on the other hand, should not be re-used. If an air conditioner
should become iced-up, switch it off and let it defrost. Observe the manufacturers maintenance
recommendations.
The separate battery compartment should be dusted out once a year. Avoid transferring dirt from
the battery compartment into the transmitter room.
- Transmitter rack
Only two types of alcohol, namely Ethyl alcohol or Glycol,or clean water should be used to remove
layers of dirt on the LCP panel. Check that key-lock switch is not in position LOCAL so that
unintentional control is avoided. Cleaning procedure: Moisten a cloth with one of the liquids menĆ
tioned above and remove dirt. Dusting of the subassemblies should only take place in conjunction
with removal of a subassembly when this becomes necessary in any case for some other purpose.
Even then, subassemblies should only be dusted if dust can be detected by means of a visual
check. They should always be dusted using a soft brush, and if possible with the aid of a vacuum
cleaner. During such operations it is essential to observe all precautionary measures described
in Section 5.2.1 for voltage-sensitive semiconductors.
- Antenna and counterpoise
The counterpoise, the RF cables, the ground wires with connections, and the antenna (PALESIT
seal) should be subjected to a visual check for corrosion and cracks at intervals to be determined
in accordance with the particular climatic conditions. In case of a heavy snowfall, the snow should
be removed from the counterpoise of the antenna. Air traffic control should be informed before the
counterpoise is mounted.
5.2.4 Documentation of System Data

The data recorded during the flight test is the only data which is binding for operation of a navigation
installation. It is advisable to check this data in accordance with the chart for periodic maintenance.
A documentation is performed by the printer of the connected PC or in a file for the transmitter data
and monitor data on the PC. The first data so-obtained of the basic adjustments of the alignment
procedure at commissioning and flight check should be recorded and stored in a reference file or on
a floppy disk. One hardcopy of the data should be completed with date and signature. The same proĆ
cedure should be followed when performing further checks, when the data recorded can be comĆ
pared with the original flight check data.
Ed. 01.04 5-3

DVOR 432
5.3 NORMAL MAINTENANCE

5.3.1 Replacing the Lithium Batteries (MSP-C, MSP-VD, LCP)
To back up data in the non volatile RAM in case of a voltage drop, the subassemblies MSG-C,
MSP-VD (MSP-D) and LCP contain Lithium batteries. Lithium batteries have an extended life time.
The battery voltage is checked by the BIT of the system. The individual batteries are soldered to the
pc boards. The battery back up function is enabled via jumpers, set during first setup or before replacĆ
ing the respective pc board. Always observe the label on the battery. The Lithium battery has to be
replaced by the same battery type. Other types of lithium battery are not approved by Thales ATM.
WARNING
Do not recharge, disassemble, heat above 100 °C or incinerate the lithium cell. Do not
short circuit, or solder directly on the cell. Disregard of the norms regarding the use of
lithium batteries may cause risk of fire, explosion or leaking out of toxid liquid and gas.
Run-down batteries are objects that can pollute the environment and must be disposed
of with proper precautions.
CAUTION
Contents of the RAM will be lost when the jumper is opened which enables battery voltage
to the RAM device.
- Replacing Lithium battery:
We recommend switching the transmitter whose Lithium batteries are to be replaced over to
standby operation and then switching it off. The other transmitter will remain switched onto the anĆ
tenna. This will ensure that any interference resulting unintentionally from the replacement proceĆ
dure will not affect the radiated signal. A soldering iron with a grounded soldering tip should be
used. A battery short-circuit via the soldering iron for the duration of soldering is unlikely to harm
the relatively high-impedance battery, but should however be avoided wherever possible. The
procedures is as follows:
- Back up the data of the respective transmitter being serviced.

- Draw out halfway concerned pc board.
- Remove jumper (X7 on MSG-C, X7 on MSP-VD (MSP-D), X36 on LCP).
- Re-tin the soldering tags of the new battery in order to ensure a good soldered connection
- Unsolder the minus and plus pole of the old battery, and remove the battery from the pc board.
- Insert the new battery, and solder the minus and plus pole of the battery.
NOTE: If the rack supply voltage needs to be disconnected during the period when the batteries
are unsoldered, the charge stored in the circuit capacitors will protect the RAM contents
for approx. 30 s. If the information is lost however, all transmitter parameters must be re-
entered when the batteries have been resoldered.
5-4 Ed. 01.04

DVOR 432
5.3.2 Maintaining Emergency Battery
5.3.2.1 Battery Voltage
Measurement of the battery voltage is performed via the CSL and evaluated by the LCP processor.
The voltage measured is that between the BAT1 or BAT2 terminals against GND (BAT0). The half voltĆ
age value should be exactly half the full value. Should unbalance occur, a fault is indicated. The deviĆ
ation in the ratio of 2:1 for the half voltage measurement increases the further the aging process of
a cell is advanced. If the deviation from the ratio of 2:1 is minimal, the battery can be maintained in
service, but should be kept under observation. If the deviation is greater (from as little as a few tenths
of one volt), each cell must be measured under load in order to determine the weak cell. This should
be replaced by a new cell as soon as possible. The battery half to be examined may be determined
as follows.
Voltage ratio: locate faulty Cell:
greater than 2:1 (e.g. 47: 23 V = 2.043:1) between center and minus
smaller than 2:1 (e.g. 47: 24 V = 1.958:1 ) between center and plus
CAUTION
Before replacing the battery or individual cells, always check:

- Is the battery-charged power supply switched on ?
- Switch off fuse switch F1 (50 A) in battery fuse box, if the BCPS is on.
5.3.3 Matching the Charging Voltage of BCPS Modules

5.3.3.1 Reasons for Voltage Matching
The BCPS has a fixed voltage of 54 V±3 % for parallel operation with lead batteries. It is not possible
to vary the output voltage for operation with other types of battery, e.g. nickel cadmium batteries. An
adjustment of ±1 V is however possible on the front panel of the slide in units. This is intended for
optimization of the trickle charge. The most important parameter for operation of lead batteries at the
BCPS is the trickle charge voltage. This voltage is 2.23 V/cell ±1% in accordance with VDE (registered
society of german electrical engineers). In the interests of optimizing the charge Thales ATM has utiĆ
lized the upper tolerance limits and fixed the trickle charge voltage at 2.25 V/cell. This results in a trickle
charge voltage of 54 V for a battery with a rated voltage of 48 V. Strictly speaking however this fixed
trickle charge value of 54 V is only valid at a temperature of 20 °C in the battery compartment. If the
temperature rises above 20 °C, it is necessary to reduce the voltage in order to maintain a sufficient
difference with respect to the gassing voltage of 2.4 V cell. If the temperature falls below 20 °C, it is
necessary to increase the charging voltage in order to ensure optimum charging. The relationship
between the temperature and the charging voltage is shown in the table below. It is valid for the types
of battery proposed or provided by Thales ATM. Please consult the manufacturer if using other types.
BATTERY TEMPERATURE IN °C TRICKLE CHARGE VOLTAGE IN V

10 55.08
15 54.54
20 54.0
25 53.46
30 52.92
Ed. 01.04 5-5

DVOR 432
The internal temperature in the battery compartment is subject to fluctuations dependent on the time
of day and time of year. The considerable mass of the batteries and the associated high thermal inertia
mean that temperature fluctuations dependent on the time of day are insignificant and can be ignored.
It is necessary on the other hand to determine the average temperature in the battery compartment
during the hot and cold seasons or to estimate it on the basis of experience. The optimum charging
voltage can be read off from the table when the average temperature has been calculated.
It is not necessary in moderate climatic zones to take seasonal fluctuations into account. If the batterĆ
ies are accommodated inside a shelter or a building, the fluctuations between summer and winter are
not very great, and the mean temperature will not deviate substantially from 20 °C. In such cases it
is not necessary to optimize the trickle charge voltage as described here. This only becomes necesĆ
sary if the batteries are installed outside the shelter or in hot or cold zones without an air-conditioned
battery compartment.
If the mean annual temperature is known during the installation phase, adjustments can be carried
out by the Thales ATM installation team. Otherwise they should be carried out by the customer's own
maintenance personnel as follows.
5.3.3.2 Matching the Voltage
NOTE: This procedure is performed once during installation or if other battery types are used.
The battery must be connected. Switch off the transmitters. Using the switches on the front panel
switch off the ACC units except the outer left one, which has to be adjusted first. Beginning with left
ACC unit adjust the ACC units as follows:
- Connect a digital voltmeter to the test jacks on the front panel of the switched-on ACC unit.
- Set the desired voltage carefully at the potentiometer on the front panel with the aid of a calibration
screwdriver. It should be possible to obtain the value specified in the table in 5.3.3.1 to within a
tolerance of ±0.2 V.
- Switch off the adjusted ACC unit.
- Switch on the next ACC unit and adjust it in the same way.
- Adjust all installed ACC units in the same way.
When all units have been set in this way measurements should be performed as follows:
- Disconnect the battery.

- Perform measurements between +BAT and -BAT on the BCPS terminal plate using a digital
voltmeter:
First measurement : Transmitter off, BCPS without load
Second measurement : Transmitter on, BCPS with load
The values should not deviate from the set value by more than ±1 %. If the deviation is greater, the
relevant module can be determined by deactivating the power units individually and observing the
voltage change. The voltage of this unit must then be corrected upwards or downwards. The BCPS
is then ready for service.
5-6 Ed. 01.04

DVOR 432
5.4 STARTUP, CARE AND MAINTENANCE OF THE LEAD BATTERY
5.4.1 Startup Specifications for the Lead Battery in Navigation Installations
5.4.1.1 General
For countries in Europe, the sets of lead batteries in the navigation installations are normally supplied
already filled and charged by the manufacturer. On site the batteries then merely need to be installed
and connected to the power supply unit of the navigation installation. Batteries supplied in a non-
filled state to their point of installation must be set up, filled and charged there in accordance with the
manufacturers handling specifications. The batteries can be supplied non-filled in either a dry pre-
charged state, or a non pre-charged state (see 5.4.1.3.2 and 5.4.1.3.3 ). The battery may not be
removed from its transport packing until immediately prior to startup.
CAUTION
Maintenance-free batteries have to be set into operation within half a year after delivery
to prevent drawback in the battery lifetime.
The startup procedure comprises the following stages:
a) Installation on site, interconnection of the cells with the cell connectors and connection to the
electrical installation;
b) Filling with accumulator acid;
c) Immediate subsequent charging or activation of the plates (see 5.4.1.3)
d) Immediate subsequent activation in standby parallel mode.
These instructions do not cover the installation work, but instead deal merely with filling and activation
using tools which, even in remote areas, are either available or easily obtainable. They moreover apĆ
ply only to batteries for which a rated acid density of 1.24 kg/l is specified by the manufacturer, e.g.
Gro E, iron-clad and block batteries, and not to starter batteries or batteries with a fixed electrolyte.
The aids required are as follows:
Accumulator acid The acid must have a particular density. If this value is incorrect, the mixture
should be made up of high-density sulphuric acid and specially purified waĆ
ter (see 5.4.1.2.2 ).
1 Acid syringe with areometer

1 Thermometer
1 Acid jug (non-metallic)
supplied with battery
1 Funnel (non-metallic)
- Float acid level indicator
- Handling specifications
- Battery-charging power supply (BCPS), type FRAKO

- Various resistors
- Single-wire cables (2.5... 6 mm@)
- Ammeter and voltmeter (accuracy <1 %)
Ed. 01.04 5-7

DVOR 432
5.4.1.2 Preliminary Operations

5.4.1.2.1 Accumulator Acid and Specially Purified Water
Diluted sulphuric acid and specially purified water are used for filling and topping up lead batteries.
The regulations specified in VDE 0510 (regulations for accumulators and battery installations), acĆ
cording to which no components which may be harmful to the plates may be used, must be conĆ
formed with. Particularly harmful substances are chlorine, which is present both in the water and in
the acid, and iron which is sometimes contained in the acid. These impurities can however easily be
evidenced. Only specially purified water, i.e. water which has been distilled or fully desalted, may be
used. It must moreover be clear, colorless and odorless
CAUTION
Boiled water, rainwater, well water, river water, tap water or condensation from machines,
heating systems etc. are unsuitable.
The sulphuric acid and the water should be kept in glass or plastic containers, which must be sealed
and covered carefully. Dust and vapors which penetrate may contaminate originally pure liquids.
5.4.1.2.2 Mixing Sulphuric Acid

If the accumulator acid does not have a specified density, specially purified water should be mixed
with a high-density acid (mixed acid) in order to obtain the values shown in the chart (Fig. 5-1).
WARNING
When mixing high-density acid with water the acid must be added to the water in a thin
stream whilst stirring with a clean wooden rod. If the water is added to the acid, the latter
will splash dangerously.
special purified water density of mixed acid (kg/l) *

Litres 0 1,200 1,250 1,300
100
1,350
10
90
20 1,400
80
30
70
40 1,500
60
quantity of mixed acid
50 1,600
50
60 1,710
40 1,800
70
A
30
80
20 90
10 100
0
values at 20 °C (68 °F) 1,180 1,220 1,260 1,300 1,340
* mixed acid: available high-density acid nominal density of accumulator acid (kg/l)
Fig. 5-1 Accumulator acid chart
5-8 Ed. 01.04

DVOR 432
Example for mixing accumulator acid:
100 l accumulator acid with a density of 1.24 kg/l is required. The mixing acid available has a density
of 1.71 kg/l. The intersection A on the right-hand side of the chart (Fig. 5-1) is obtained as follows:
The slope 1.71 (density of mixed acid) intersects the vertical 1.24 (nominal density of accumulator
acid). The horizontal through point A intersects the slope at 72 l (specified purified water) and the vertiĆ
cal at 31 l (quantity of mixed acid) in the left-hand section of the chart. The two quantities must then
be mixed in order to obtain 100 l acid with a density of 1.24 kg/l. This chart is only valid for temperaĆ
tures of +20 °C. For other operating temperatures see 5.4.1.2.3 .
When purchasing mixed acid it may be that the quantity is specified in kilograms on the container.
The chart (Fig. 5-1) is however only valid for quantities specified in liters. Kilograms can be converted
to liters as follows:
Quantity in kg
Quantity in l =
Acid density in kg/l
5.4.1.2.3 Relationship between the Acid Density and the Temperature
The nominal acid density of fixed batteries is valid at an acid temperature of 20 °C. If the temperature
increases the density will be reduced by 0.0007 kg/l per °C; if the temperature falls it will be increased
accordingly. Thus if the temperature rises by 15 °C the density will be reduced by approx 0.01 kg/l;
if the temperature falls by 15 °C the density will be increased by approx. 0.01 kg/l. The chart (Fig. 5-2)
shows the acid densities for various temperatures in relation to a temperature of +20 °C.
measured density
kg/l
1,35 density at +20 °C

(reference temperature)
kg/l acid temperature
°C
1,30
1,30 50
40
1,25
1,25
30
1,20 1,20 20
10
1,15
1,15 0
1,10 -10
1,10
-20
Example: - measured density=1.23 kg/l

- measured acid temperature =+35 °C
The line between the two points intersects the middle scale at 1.24 kg/l
(density at reference temperature of +20 °C).
Fig. 5-2 Chart showing the relationship between the acid density and the temperature
Ed. 01.04 5-9

DVOR 432
5.4.1.2.4 Basic Rules for Handling Batteries

A few basic rules listed below should be observed when handling batteries:
WARNING
It is forbidden to use naked flames or incandescent bodies in the vicinity of accumulators.

This is particularly dangerous during the charging procedure, since oxyhydrogen gas is
produced when the gassing level of the accumulator acid.
Caution should be observed when opening the inspection plugs. On no account should
salt crystals or other foreign bodies be allowed to get into the acid is reached.
Caution should be observed when topping up with specially purified water and when meaĆ
suring the acid density. Remove splashes of liquid, or conductive layers might form, allowĆ
ing creepage. Seal the inspection plugs again.
Maintenance-free batteries need not to be refilled. No acid density check is necessary.
Caution should be observed when mixing high-density acid with water. The acid should
be added to the water in a thin stream whilst stirring with a clean wooden rod. If water is
added to the acid, the latter will splash dangerously.
Splashes of acid should be neutralized and salts removed using a lukewarm soda soluĆ
tion (100 g soda to 1 l water).
Care should be taken to ensure that no soda solution gets into the cells. After treating with
the soda solution, clean with clear water and wipe dry.
Sufficient ventilation should be provided for the battery compartment. The acid vapors are
aggressive; be careful of clothing.
Specially marked and stored test leads should be used for battery measurements on acĆ
count of the acid residues which may be present.
The following points should be observed in order to prevent false acid density measurements with
the areometer:
a) The areometer float should not stick to the side or hit the top, and should always be clean.
b) When the battery is charged or discharged a period of about 30 minutes should be waited
before commencing measurements in order to allow time for the acid density between and
above the plates to become uniform.
c) If specially purified water is used for topping up, no measurements should be performed for
the next few hours.
d) If the temperature should deviate substantially from the reference temperature of +20 °C, this
should be taken into consideration when performing measurements (the density decreases with
higher temperatures and increases with lower temperatures).
5-10 Ed. 01.04

DVOR 432
5.4.1.2.5 Filling the Batteries with Acid
A particular quantity of accumulator acid is required for each battery type. This quantity is specified
by the manufacturer or is defined by the cell levels (acid level indicator or max. marking on the cell
box). The tolerance of the accumulator acid density is ± 0.01 kg/l.The acid temperature should not
exceed +35 _C, since heat is developed internally following filling, and higher acid temperatures may
cause the maximum permitted battery temperature to be exceeded.
In hot climates with the associated high ambient temperatures it is particularly difficult to cool down
the batteries during the day. We therefore recommend slowly filling the batteries half full in such reĆ
gions, then filling them right up the next day after they have cooled down during the night.
NOTE: The battery should not be removed from its transport packaging until immediately prior
to the startup (see also Section 5.4.1.1).
5.4.1.3 Startup
Initial charging or activation.
5.4.1.3.1 General
The initial charging fully activates the plates, and for this special rules and data apply which deviate
from the standard values for battery operation and charging procedures. If the initial charging proceĆ
dure is not performed in accordance with the specifications, the plates will only be partly activated;
coarse sulphates will be produced, and the batteries will not reach their full capacity. Such damage
can only sometimes be eliminated by means of a time-consuming desulphating procedure.
As mentioned above in 5.4.1.1, the batteries may be supplied non-filled in either a dry pre-charged
state, or a non pre-charged state. This is not apparent externally except from the color of the plates.
The positive plate of activated batteries has a brown coloring (Pb O2), whilst the negative plate is light
grey (Pb).
5.4.1.3.2 Dry Pre-charged Batteries
Dry pre-charged batteries are activated by the manufacturer. They can be started up simply by filling
the battery with accumulator acid of the specified acid density. The battery can then be operated in
the navigation installation without any further delay. This however applies only to brand new batteries,
since these batteries are extremely sensitive to climatic conditions.If dry pre-charged batteries are
stored for some time without being filled with acid, the plates will gradually become deactivated. This
process is accelerated in a moist or warm environment.They will be completely deactivated after
about 6 months, and the battery must be treated and started up in almost the same way as a non-actiĆ
vated battery. The initial charging procedure will take more or less time depending on the storage periĆ
od and the state of the plates.
5.4.1.3.3 Non Pre-charged Batteries
These batteries have the longest initial charging period. They can be recognized by the fact that the
acid density drops substantially 1 to 2 hours after filling (density <1.15 kg/l), and/or the acid temperaĆ
ture rises by a few degrees.
Ed. 01.04 5-11

DVOR 432
5.4.1.3.4 Initial Charging
WARNING
There is a particular risk during the charging procedure, since oxyhydrogen gas develops
in the gassing level of the battery acid is reached. It is therefore forbidden to use naked
flames or incandescent bodies in the vicinity of accumulators. Sufficient ventilation should
be provided for the battery compartment. The acid vapors are aggressive, therefore care
should be taken of clothing.
The battery manufacturers specify various methods with settings and nominal data. The appropriate
instructions are contained in the handling specifications accompanying with each battery. A constant
current charge (I-characteristic) is used for the battery charged power supply in the navigation instalĆ
lation. Two test shunts, which generate a voltage drop of 2 mV/A, are installed in the BCPS. Current
measurements can thus be performed via the software.
The acid density and temperature must be measured and noted once an hour during the charging
procedure at every 6th or 3rd cell (test cells). The same applies to the battery voltage, which should
be measured at the battery poles. For voltage measurements see Chapter 5.4.1.1).The duration of
the charging procedure depends on the state of the plates, and should be at least 6 hours.The crucial
factor for determining the end of the charging procedure is that the battery voltage and the acid densiĆ
ty no longer rise over a test interval of 2 hours, and that the nominal values have been reached.If the
acid density and the battery voltage do not reach their nominalvalues despite absolute conformance
with the charging specifications, the charging procedure must be continued with the same charging
data for a further 10 hours. If the acid density still does not reach its nominal value, the acid density
must be adjusted. If the density is too low, higher-density acid (mixed acid) must be added. If the
acid density is too high, specially purified water must be used for topping up. The temperature and
acid level must be taken into consideration when measuring the density, in other words the nominal
acid density is valid when the acid level indicator is at max.
If water is lost during the charging procedure on account of gassing, the acid must be topped up with
specially purified water. If it is necessary to correct the acid density or acid level, the battery must be
topped up beforehand with specially purified water. If it is necessary to correct the acid density or acid
level, the battery must be charged again with the same charging values for approx. 1 hour in order
to make sure the acid is properly mixed. This is ensured by means of the gassing which results.The
acid temperature must be monitored during the charging procedure. This is particularly important in
case of high ambient temperatures. The acid temperature may not exceed 55 °C. If a temperature
of 50 °C is reached, a cooling period should be allowed until the temperature has dropped to 35 °C
again.
The battery is ready for service when the nominal values have been reached and each cell has the
correct acid level (max. marking of acid level indicator). Finally the outside of the battery should be
cleaned with water to remove acid and dirt. The battery should then be installed immediately in the
navigation installation, and operated in standby parallel mode. This procedure ensures that the batĆ
tery is always charged, but that it is not operated close to the gassing level. The charge characteristic
of the BCPS (current/voltage characteristic or I-U characteristic) ensures that the limit values speciĆ
fied by the battery manufacturer are conformed with, including subsequently charging and dischargĆ
ing operation. No further measures are necessary.
NOTE: Each battery cell/battery must have the same charge or discharge state on account of the
series connection.
The following table summarizes the procedure.
5-12 Ed. 01.04

DVOR 432
No. Procedure Duration in hrs Remarks

1 Filling with acid - See 5.4.1.2 (Preliminary Operations). Unscrew
inspection plugs, but leave over the hole in order
to prevent contamination whilst allowing gas to
escape.
2 Interval 2
3 Density measurements - The density provides information on the state of
plates. Densities less than 1.15 kg/l mean that
the battery has been stored for a long time or is
not pre-charged. A higher charging current can
be used in such cases.
4 Charging as per data, see 6 ... 55 The acid density and battery voltage should be
also WARNING in section measured every 1 or 2 hours. Note the values
5.4.1.3.4 . and compare with previous measurements and
nominal values. When the nominal values are
reached, stop charging and continue at No. 5 in
this table.
5 Interval 1
6 Acid level correction - With purified water.
7 Charging with data as No. 4 2 Repeat Nos. 7 to 9 until the acid density and batĆ
in this table tery voltage cease to change when the previous
measurements, and the nominal values are
reached.
8 Interval 1
9 Acid density and battery -
voltage measurements
10 Set acid density and acid - If corrections are necessary, recommence at No.
level to nominal values. 7.
Screw on
inspection plugs.
11 Clean battery with water - See 5.4.1.2.4 (basic rules for handling batterĆ
(external surfaces) and ies).
grease poles.
12 Operate battery in standby -
parallel mode.
5.4.2 Care and Maintenance of the Lead Battery

5.4.2.1 Maintenance Accessories and Scope of Checks
The accessories below are required for monitoring and maintenance of the battery.
1 Acid syringe with areometer
1 Acid jug
1 Funnel non-metal
1 Container with specially purified water
Various cleaning agents (acid-resistant Vaseline, soda, cotton rags).
The maintenance chapters below refer to the scope of check to be carried out. The checks and related
operations should be performed regularly every 2 to 3 months. The Basic Rules for Handling Batteries
(see 5.4.1.2.4 ) should be observed.
Ed. 01.04 5-13

DVOR 432
5.4.2.1.1 Keeping the Lead Battery Clean
The battery box with batteries, boxes, terminals and connections should be kept clean and dry. When
performing the regular check pay special attention to the poles and cell connections, since these are
particularly subject to acid aggression and susceptible to the formation of salt crystals, especially at
the plus-pole. The poles and cell connections should be greased slightly with an acid-resistant
Vaseline following cleaning.
5.4.2.1.2 Measuring the Acid Density (not for maintenance-free batteries)
The acid density should be measured using the areometer. False measurements can be avoided by
observing the rules, see 5.4.1.2.4 . The density of accumulator acid is 1.24 ± 0.01 kg/l at 20 °C when
the battery is charged. If the temperature deviates substantially from the reference temperature of
20 °C, this should be taken into account when measurements are performed.
5.4.2.1.3 Topping Up the Cells (not for maintenance-free batteries)
The cells should be topped up in good time with specially purified water. A visual check of the cells
should be done approx. every 2 to 3 month. An acid level indicator with two markings 10 mm apart
is incorporated in one of the cells for determining the nominal acid level. If this indicator is missing,
the cells should be topped up to 15 mm above the top of the plates. It is not always possible to obtain
specially purified or desalinated water of the required quality at the point of installation. In countries
where the water quality is inadequate the specially purified or fully desalinated water in stock should
be checked before use in accordance with the handling specifications of the battery manufacturer
(test chemicals supplied if required). If the purified water does not meet the specifications, it must be
post-treated (ion exchanger or distilling apparatus - supplied on request) or suitable water must
be obtained.
CAUTION
The battery guarantee is only valid if the accumulator acid and water have the necessary
degree of purity.
5.4.2.1.4 Measuring the Cell Voltage
The nominal voltage of the lead cells has been fixed at 2.0 V. The no-load voltage is 2.04 to 2.1 V
depending on the acid density. The discharge voltage is dependent on the discharge current.
The higher the discharge current, the lower will be the cell voltage and vice versa. Under normal operĆ
ating conditions with trickle charging the cell voltage is 2.25 V. In case of a failure or disconnection
of the 230 or 115 V mains voltage resulting in discharging of the batteries, the cell voltage will be
2.1...1.75 V after about 5 minutes up to disconnection of the PMM. The cell voltage should not fall
below 1.75 V during discharging. This is ensured by the supervision of the (D)VOR installation. The
cell voltage can be measured either as described in 5.4.1.1 or using a multimeter. Only special test
leads provided exclusively for battery measurements should be used however, due to of the acid resiĆ
dues which may be present at the battery poles. It is sufficient to check the voltage of all cells under
charging current every 2 to 3 months.
5-14 Ed. 01.04

DVOR 432
Operation and Maintenance Fault Location
CHAPTER 6
FAULT LOCATION AND REPAIR
6.1 FAULT LOCATION
6.1.1 General
Fault location in the DVOR System can be executed with the PC and ADRACS (see Section 6.1.2)
or with the fault location support procedure in Section 6.1.3. You should print out all settings, BITE
values and monitor values of the transmitter, the monitor and LCP on the finally set system that has
reached operating temperature. This data consists of the reference values, a knowledge of which will
substantially facilitate troubleshooting. These values are assumed for the following troubleshooting
procedure. If HF modules are replaced, the printout should be updated because HF modules have
greater tolerances. This log of the ACTUAL state is a basis for the troubleshooting procedure.
NOTE: Both SB1, SB2 and SBA, SBB are used as term for sideband signals in CVOR/DVOR sysĆ
tems. SBA, SBB are used normally for CVOR (signals to dipole A or B), the terms SB1,
SB2 are generally used in other Navaids 400 systems.
6.1.2 Fault Evaluation with PC and ADRACS
Any fault is stored in the system memory, which occurs in the installation and is acknowledged by
the internal BIT and which leads to a WARNING or ALARM indication. Fault location in Navaids 400
can be performed by use of the BIT report in the ADRACS program. This report is available in the conĆ
figuration menu of the ADRACS program:
- Move mouse cursor to field TRANSMITTER or MONITOR or LCP, a cursor more appears.
- Click twice for more information about transmitter or monitor or LCP. The ensuing BIT results are
displayed and can be interpreted or printed out.
6.1.3 Fault Location Support DVOR (50 W and 100 W)
In addition to the BIT fault report ( see 6.1.2), the following fault location tables list typical faults, which
may occur in a DVOR installation. The tables contain 5 columns: Step, Fault, A to C. To execute fault
location in the following tables, start with left column and proceed to the right following A, B or C, and
then from next row in A to C, if necessary.
6.1.3.1 Power Supply and Module Indicators
The BIT fault report (see 6.1.2) indicates faulty operating voltages, so that the defective module
(AC/DC converter or DC/DC converter) can be defined and replaced. Before replacing the AC/DC
converters, check mains power supply. Before locating a fault, try to define roughly the defective funcĆ
tional group, i.e. power supply, transmitter, antenna, monitor or LCP. A first localization is done by evalĆ
uating the LED indicators on the various modules (see Figs. 3-15, 3-16):
Step Fault A B C
1 ACC LED out? ACC switched to ON? Check power supply to
ACC or change ACC
2 DCC LED out? ACC switched to ON? Check power supply to
TX1/TX2 at PMM switched on? DCC or change DCC
3 LCP Live-lamp out? DC operating voltage ok? Reset LCP
4 MSP-VD Live-lamp out? DC operating voltage ok? Resetprocessor
5 MSG-C Live-lamp out? DC operating voltage ok? Resetprocessor
6 CSL MON1 LED lit? Monitor 1 faulty Check according to followĆ
MON2 LED lit? Monitor 2 faulty ing tables 6.1.3.2 ff.
TX1 ON LED out? TX1 power supply on?
TX2 ON LED out? TX2 power supply on?
Ed. 01.04 6-1

DVOR 432
Fault Location Operation and Maintenance
6.1.3.2 Localization of the defective Equipment Part (1)

Step Fault A B C
1.1 Bothmonitors Feed the transmitting antenna If the fault disappears, search
show the same from the other transmitter. for it in the transmitter
fault.
Are both monitors fed from Is the transmitter correctly set? If yes, check the dipole
the same dipole via one line? and the line
1.2 The affiliation to The transmitting antennas or Check the levels of the returnĆ
the transmitter the HF lines to the antennas ing HF signals:
or monitor is are defective. Antenna and/or cable to
still unclear. TX1/2 BITE ADC-1: ASU defective for:
ACA1R too high Carrier or cable
ASB1R too high Cable from SB1 to ASU
ASB2R too high Cable from SB2 to ASU
Are the return signals in order This is an indication of a

when the transmitter is running fault in the antenna syĆ
on dummy load? stem.
If no success, search directly

via the displayed monitor fault.
1.3 Only one moniĆ Continue searching for a
tor shows a monitor fault as from 8.1.
fault.
6.1.3.3 Status Check of the Microprocessor of the MSG-C (2)

Step Fault A B C
2.1 Status check The bottom LED on the The processor is running, ok.
by LEDs. MSG-C lights up continuĆ
ously. This is the Live lamp.
The bottom LED on the The processor has stopped. Attempt a reset; if the proĆ
MSG-C is off or lights up with Every interruption is an indicaĆ cessor stops again, the
briefinterruptions. tion of a processor fault. MSG-C is defective. Do
not repeat this; the procesĆ
sor must start up itself and
must not stop.
The second LED from the top The LCP polls the transmitter, 1) Replace the MSG-C
on the MSG-C lights up at ok.
brief intervals. 2) Check the 64-pole flat
ribbon cables from BP-C,
The second LED from the top The LCP does not poll the connector X82, to LCP,
on the MSG-C stays permaĆ transmitter, or the transmitter is and connector X71/TX1
nently off. not receiving the data. (X72/TX2) to BP-T, conĆ
nector X70.
3) Otherwise, replace the

LCP
The top LED on the MSG-C The transmitter is not sending 1) The MSG-C is defecĆ
lights up at brief intervals. any data to the LCP tive, and must be replaced
The top LED on the MSG-C The transmitter is not respondĆ 2) Check the 64-pole ribĆ
stays permanently off. ing to the polling calls of the bon cable from BP-C
LCP. (X71/TX1 or X72/TX2), to
BP-T, connector X70.
6-2 Ed. 01.04

DVOR 432
6.1.3.4 RF-Level too low or missing (3)
* 100 W version only
Step Fault A B C
3.1 One monitor Fault in the monitor dipole Fault in the HF cable from Search for the fault in the
good, one moĆ monitor dipole to transmitter bad monitor and continue
nitor bad with 8.1.
3.2 Bothmonitors Search for the fault in the line
show the same from monitor dipole to transĆ
fault. mitter or in the transmitter.
3.2.1 Antenna or Measure the leading HF sigĆ TX1/2 BITE ADC-1: ACA1 If the rated value is good,
cable defective. nal at the transmitter output. examine the monitor. If the
signal is too low, search
Check the returning signal at TX1/2 BITE ADC-1: ACA1R for the fault in the transmitĆ
the transmitter output. normal? Otherwise, check the ter.
impedance of the transmitter's
termination.
3.2.2 Transmitter inĆ CSB power correctly set? TX1/2-Adjustm. CSB-Power? The nominal value should
correctlyset. be set here.
3.2.3 Transmitter RF CSB power switched off via TX1/2 BITE Digital: CSB-Power State must
power off? the control bit? CSB-Power State? be ON.
3.2.4 Supply voltage One or several supply voltĆ MON1/2 BITE Measurement: Nominal voltage ±5 %; in
for HF section? ages considerably below the DCC-MV TX1/2 (+28 V) the event of a fault, reĆ
minimum? supplies the modulators. place the power supply,
DCC-MV or DCC-28.
TX1/2-BITE ADC-2: V281
(+28 V) supplies CA-100*.
3.2.5.1 Synthesizer Synthesizer operating outside MON1/2 Measurement:
of the frequency range from Carrier Frequency?
108 to 118MHz Both monitors show a freĆ Replace the synthesizer.
quency error.
Only one monitor shows a freĆ Replace corr. MSP-VD or
quency error. check cable; see 8.6, 8.7.
3.2.5.2 Synthesizer Synthesizer HF output level TX1/2 BITE Digital: Replace the synthesizer.
too low. Synth. Level CSB-Signal?
3.2.6 Switched off because the conĆ TX1/2 BITE Digital: If yes, continue with
trol loop has a discontinuity. Loop Modulator CSB-1? 3.2.6.1.
3.2.6.1 Control loop of First set CSB=0 W. RF-Level >50 %:
the transmitter Then set CSB=5 W or less. control loop open, thin HF - Check cable
has a discontiĆ cable has come off CA-100,
nuity. or has been pressed out of - Check cable
CCP-D,
Directional coupler in the - Replace CA-100*
CA-100* defective or has a
discontinuity,
MOD 110 for CSB is defective - Replace MOD-110 for
CSB
or CCP-D defective - Replace CCP-D
3.2.6.2 Check ampliĆ First set CSB=0 W, 30 % < RF-Level <40 % Modulation depth at nomiĆ
tude control Then set CSB=0.1 Pnom. Control loop is good. nal power is reduced
loop. CA-100* only operating with Replace CA-100*.
partial power.
3.2.7 Control signal from the TX1/2 BITE ADC2: Substantially less than the
MSG-S is too low. Set the CSB_1S2, CSB_1_ST_6 at the nominal value.
transmitter's nominal power. nominal value? Replace the MSG-S
Ed. 01.04 6-3

DVOR 432
6.1.3.5 Modulation Depth of Carrier too low (4)

Applicability: VOR: 9960 Hz auxiliary carrier, identity and voice, not for 30 Hz AM composed of carrier and sideband.
DVOR: 30 Hz AM, identity and voice, not for the 9960 auxiliary carrier, which is composed of carrier and
sideband.
* 100 W version only
Step Fault A B C
4.1 One monitor Search for the fault in the bad Condition: neither monitor may
good, one monitor and continue with 8.1. have more than 110 % RF
monitor bad level; otherwise, measuring erĆ
rors may occur.
4.2 Bothmonitors Search for the fault in the Condition: neither monitor may
show the same transmitter. have more than 110 % RF
fault. level; otherwise, measuring erĆ
rors may occur.
TX1/2 BITE ADC-1: Check the impedance of

ACA1R normal? the transmitter's terminaĆ
tion if ACA1R is substanĆ
tially higher.
4.2.1 Adjustment erĆ Modulation depth correctly - Mod. Depth 30 Hz AM Correctly set modulation
ror set? - Mod. Depth Voice AM depths.
- Mod. Depth Identity AM
4.2.2 Limiting in the CA-100 goes into limiting too TX1/2 BITE ADC-1:
HF power secĆ early. ACM1 higher than normal? Replace CA-100*
tion
Halve the set power "Carrier
Power":
- Mod. depth is increased: CA-100* defective
- Mod. depth remains: Other fault
4.2.3 Carrier modulator MOD-110 TX1/2 BITE ADC-1:
goes into limiting. ACM1 normal or lower? Replace MOD-110 (CSB)
Halve the set power "Carrier

Power":
- Mod. depth is increased: MOD-110 (CSB) faulty
- Mod. depth remains: Other fault
4.3 Controlsignals Control signal from the CSB_1_S2 normal? If no, replace MSG-S.
MSG-S is not correct. CSB_1_ST6 normal?
4.3.1 VOR only
4.3.2 The modulation depth of the TransmitterCommands: Identity must be "ON".
identity is wrong or is missing. - Is "Identity OFF"?
- Is Mod. Depth Identity AM
setcorrectly?
Set output power to 0.5 Pnom:
- Is the identity then OK? If yes, CA-100* or

To recheck this, you may MOD-110 (CSB) are
need to set Ident CW- overdriven; see 4.2.2 and
Mode 4.2.3.
6-4 Ed. 01.04

DVOR 432
Step Fault (4 cont.) A B C
4.3.3 The modulation depth of the Re-check under 'TX1/2 BITE If these signals are not
identity is wrong and, indeĆ ADC-2': good, replace MSG-S or
pendently of the transmitted ID_ST_2 and ID_ST_5 MSG-C.
power, the control signal is
wrong.
4.3.4 Ident Morse code is not workĆ Is the code correctly set? Replace MSG-C
ing or is defective. The Morse code is generated
completely on the MSG-C.
6.1.3.6 Modulation by Sidebands too low or wrong (5)

Thisdescriptionconcernssignalsthatarecomposedofcarrier(CSB) and sideband signals (SBO). Here, not only the right level
conditionsof CSB and SBO must be ensured, but also the right phase. Errors of the sidebands almost always lead to azimuth
errors. Both error types must be considered in relation to one another.
Step Fault A B C
5.1 One monitor Search for the fault in the bad Condition: neither monitor may
good, one monitor and continue with 8.1. have more than 110 % RF
monitor bad level; otherwise, measuring erĆ
rors may occur.
5.2 Bothmonitors Search for the fault in the Condition: neither monitor may
show the same transmitter. have more than 110 % RF
fault. level; otherwise, measuring erĆ
rors may occur.
TX1/2 BITE ADC-1: Otherwise, check the imĆ

ACA1R normal? pedance at the correĆ
ASB1R and ASB2R normal? sponding transmitter terĆ
mination.
5.2.1 9960 Hz Mod.- 9960 Hz Mod.-depth too low, TX1/2 Adjustments: Ensure correct carrier leĆ
depth too low carrier level too great Carrier power set correctly? vel.
TX1/2Measurement:
CSB Amplitude Measurement?
5.2.1.1 Signals ASB1 and ASB2 at Compare drive signals If results equal or greater
the output of the modulators SB1A_ST3 and SB2A_ST3 than the original values,
are lower than the basic adĆ with the original values. replace the corresponding
justment. modulator.
The fault may also be cauĆ
sed by the CCP-D.
5.2.1.2 Amplitude of the sideband TX1/2 Adjustments: If SB1 and SB2 amplitude
transmitter is too low: SB1 power level, measurementsdeviate
- SB level set correctly? SB2 power level <±5 % to former measuĆ
red value (same operating
state), the output level is
ok.
- SB power generated TX1/2 Measurements: Both values too low, check

sufficiently? SB1 amplitude measurement, 28 V voltage supply.
SB2 amplitude measurement
- 28 V available? MON1/2 BITE Measurement: Too low?

28 V DCC-MV > 26.5 V? Replace DCC-MV.
If 28 V ok, replace corresĆ
ponding SB modulator.
Ed. 01.04 6-5

DVOR 432

5.2.1.3 The synthesizer does not osĆ MON1/2 Measurement: If the frequency is wrong,
cillate in the range from 108 to Upper Sideband Frequency replace SYN.
118 MHz. SB1?
Lower Sideband Frequency
SB2?
Synthesizer output level too TX1/2 BITE Digital: Level too low, replace
low Level SB1: BFSB1 ok? SYN.
Level SB2: BFSB2 ok?
5.2.1.4 Power generated by the TX1/2 Adjustments ASU: All values set correctly?
MOD-SBB in the ASU too SBA Sinus Blending (SB1)
low. The blending function is SBA Cosinus Blending (SB1)
not correctly set. SBB Sinus Blending (SB2)
SBB Cosinus Blending (SB2)
5.2.1.5 The transmitter generates sufĆ TX1/2 BITE ASU: At least one signal is set
ficient SB power. All results of lower than the original vaĆ
5.2.1.2 are ok. Blending funcĆ lue. Replace in ASU:
tions are correctly set. BLEND_SB1_SINUS faulty? - MOD-SBB/1
Power of blending modulators BLEND_SB1_COSINUSfaulty? - MOD-SBB/1
is too low. BLEND_SB2_SINUS faulty? - MOD-SBB/2
BLEND_SB2_COSINUSfaulty? - MOD-SBB/2
If all values are ok, contiĆ

nue with 5.2.2 SB Phase
5.2.2 Side band and carrier phases do not match.
5.2.2.1 Wrong carrier First check carrier phase. TX-1 Measurement:
phase (CSB) This value is not dependent CSB RF Phase Measurement. Is the original value of ±5°
from the adjustment. reached?
TX1/2 BITE ADC-1: Do both have the original

BU_MOD_C1? value?
TX1/2 Miscellaneous:
MOD-CSB-1 Sign Control?
BU_MOD_C1 should lie within

the range from +2V to +8V.
Phase adjustment of carrier is Replace:

not possible ifā BU_MOD_C1 - MOD-110 (CSB)
lies between -0.5 and +1.5 V - CCP-D
or between 9 and 27 V. - (possibly MSG-C )
5.2.2.2 Wrong SB Sideband phase set corĆ TX1/2 Adjustments: A phase deviation results
phase rectly? SB RF Phase? in a lower Mod. depth of
SB RF Phase control voltage? the 9960 Hz auxiliary carĆ
rier.
Sideband phase correct? TX1/2 Measurement:
SB RF Phase Measurement
Fault <10° is ok.
Phase control voltage for both TX1/2 BITE ADC-2: Deviation >1V, replace
SB modulators ok? ControlSB2P_ST_3 MSG-S
TX1/2 BITE ADC-1: If no, replace MOD-110

BU_PH_SB2, original value? (SB2)
TX1/2 BITE ADC-2: Deviation >1V, refer to

ControlSB1P_ST_3 5.2.2.3
TX1/2 BITE ADC-1: If no, replace MOD-110

BU_PH_SB1, original value? (SB1)
6-6 Ed. 01.04

DVOR 432
5.2.2.3 Sideband conĆ All former measurements are Phase control does not work. Replace modules in ASU:
trol does not ok except of TX1/2 MeasureĆ - BSG-D
work. ment values: deviation >10° Phase control always works - PMC-D
only at the aerial transmitter. - Check flat ribbon cable
W58 (ASU Interface
NOTE: cable).
This is because the radiated
sideband signals are received
for control via the center (carĆ
rier) antenna
The phase control of the
standby transmitter cannot be
checked. The phase value of
the standby transmitter is stoĆ
red. It is not controlled.
Ed. 01.04 6-7

DVOR 432
6.1.3.7 Wrong Carrier Frequency (6)

Step Fault A B C
6.1 One monitor Search for the fault in the bad
good, one monitor and continue with 8.1.
monitor bad
6.2 Bothmonitors Is the right frequency enĆ TX1/2 Adjustments: ReplaceSynthesizer, if adĆ
show wrong tered? Transmitter Frequency? justed and measured carĆ
frequency vaĆ rier frequency deviate
lues. Carrier frequency correct? MON-1 Measurement: more than 1.2 kHz.
Carrierfrequency?
Upper sideband frequency Sidebandfrequencies
(SB1)? may deviate from the carĆ
Lower sideband frequency rier frequency no more
(SB2)? than 10 kHz±0.2 kHz.
Otherwise replace the
Synthesizer.
6.1.3.8 Azimuth Indication (7)

Step Fault A B C
7.1 One monitor Search for the fault in the bad
good, one monitor and continue with 8.1.
monitor bad
7.2 Bothmonitors Check the following values on
show wrong vaĆ both monitors:
lues.
TX1/2 Adjustments: Sideband power and sideband Refer to 5.2.1 and 5.2.2
Azimut Alignment correctly phase ok?
set? Phase control is working? Refer to 5.2.2.3
MON-1/2Measurement: TX1/2 Adjustments ASU:

- Mod. Depth 9960 Hz AM Start Antenna Single Step Has to be OFF.
30 ±2 % ?
- Mod. Index 30 Hz FM TX1/2 Measurement:
16 ±2 %? MSG 30 Hz frequency If 30 Hz, replace
- Mod. Depth 30 Hz AM MSG-C
30 ±2 % ? TX1/2 BITE ASU:
30_Hz_SYNC: original value? Check BSG-D and
TX1/2 BITE ASU: ASC-D in ASU.
750_Hz_SYNC: original value?
Carrier modulation ok? If not, check 4.2.1 to 4.3
6-8 Ed. 01.04

DVOR 432
6.1.3.9 Fault in the Monitor (8)
The fault is presumed in the monitor. As both monitors are independent of one another, only one monitor will show the fault.
Step Fault A B C
8.1 Status check The third LED from above on The processor is running, ok
by LEDs the MSP-VD lights up continĆ
uously. This is the Live lamp.
The third LED from above on The processor has stopped. Attempt a reset; if the proĆ
the MSP-VD is off or lights Every interruption is an indicaĆ cessor stops again, the
up with brief interruptions. tion of a processor fault. MSP-VD is faulty, replace.
The second LED from the top The LCP polls the monitor, ok.
on the MSP-VD lights up at
brief intervals.
The LCP does not poll the
The second LED from the top monitor, or the monitor is not 1) Replace MSP-VD
on the MSP-VD stays permaĆ receiving the data. 2) Replace LCP
nently off.
The top LED on the MSP-VD The monitor sends data to the
lights up at brief intervals. LCP, ok
The top LED on the MSP-VD

stays permanently off. The monitor is not responding The MSP-VD is defective;
to the polling calls of the LCP. replace it.
The bottom LED indicates the The LED is bright when the
identity tone. 1020 Hz identifier tone is presĆ
See: 4.3.2 to 4.3.4. ent.
8.2 Check with the The test generator on the CSL MON-1/2Measurement: The MSP-VD module
testgenerator generates normal navigation contains the complete sigĆ
signals in 45° increments of - TSG RF-Level nal processing and evaluĆ
the azimuth, as well as one - TSG Azimuth ation circuitry.
without 30 Hz modulation and - TSG Mod.Depth 30Hz AM
one without 9960 Hz auxiliary - TSG Mod.Depth 9960Hz AM
carrier. With the hexadeciĆ - TSG Mod. Index 30Hz FM
mally coded switch on the
CSL, the corresponding chanĆ The MSP-VD is defective if In the event of a fault, reĆ
nel is set and is fed into the one or several of these signals place the MSP-VD.
monitor instead of the demoĆ show(s) the same fault as in Calibrate the new one.
dulated HF signal. the case of the transmitter. BeĆ
fore replacing the MSP-VD,
check the calibration of the inĆ
correctly displayed value.
8.3 Checking the All TSG signals are displayed The branches: band filter, HF
HF branch of correctly, but the monitor amplifier, AGC setting and deĆ
the MSP-VD shows incorrect signals of the modulator are not used by the
transmitter. TSG signals. These faults canĆ
not be detected via the TSG.
Change the AGC value until If 100 % cannot be set, or

the RF level is at 100±5 %. only in the event of a conĆ
siderably deviating AGC,
the HF branch of the MSP
is defective; replace and
readjust the MSP-VD.
8.4 Both MSP-VD The modules have been damĆ Replace both MSP-VD.
show the same aged, e.g. by a lightning strike.
value after 8.2.
Ed. 01.04 6-9

DVOR 432

8.5 The identity is Is the second monitor working One monitor is good.
not displayed. properly?
If the modulation depth of the The second monitor does not The corresponding MSP is
identifier is greater than 4 %, detect the identity. defective and must be reĆ
the bottom green LED must placed.
indicate the identity tone.
8.6 One monitor The monitor measures the freĆ MSP-VD defective Replace MSP-VD.
shows a wrong quency of both transmitters
carrier frequenĆ wrongly or shows 0 kHz.
cy.
Both monitors measure the Wrong frequency, but f 0 Synthesizerdefective
frequency of one transmitter
correctly, but measure the freĆ Frequency 0 kHz or 0.1 kHz. Synthesizer defective or
quency of the other wrongly. 64-pole flat ribbon cable
from BP-C, connector
X71/TX1 (X72/TX2) to
BP-T, connector X70, deĆ
fective or has come loose.
6-10 Ed. 01.04

DVOR 432
6.1.3.10 Fault of the Local Control Panel (LCP) (9)
The LCP is the focal point for communication which interfaces the local PC and the Remote Control to the transmitters and
monitors. The LCP evaluates directly the battery and the mains monitoring. The LCP consists of two boards: LC-CPU, LCI.
Step Fault A B C
9.1 Live lamp off LCP board: live lamp on LC- Standstill of LCP-processor Measure at back panel
CPU off. Liquid crystal display or/and possibly no power supĆ BP-C the '5VK' voltage
screen is dark. Keys do not ply. against GND:
function.
ALARM and NORMAL remain Reset Processor of LC-CPU If 5VK is 4,9 V change
lit, LCD screen is dark. board. ALARM and NORMAL DCC-3-05.
indicatorslightsimultaneously,
until processor is initializing If 5VK is 4,9 V, check
and extinguish after that. 14-pole flat ribbon cable
from CSL front (connector
Execute lamp test: Press siĆ X4) to LCP ( connector
multaneously keys XMTR and CT5).
MON at front panel. Indicators
must light, the buzzer gives a If lamp test is not successĆ
short tone. For this test the ful though the 5VK voltage
processor and software must is ok, the LCP is faulty. ReĆ
run. place completely the LCP.
LCI: LCD LCP board: live lamp on Check ±15 V voltage supply If ok, replace LCI board
screen dark LC-CPU on. from CSL. with LCD display.
If check fauls again, reĆ
place CSL.
9.2 Live lamp on Transmitter rack, LCP: The At least one *.sit file is missing
display in MAIN STATUS field or damaged in the LCP.
indicates WARNING.
The RAM-check states a fault.
Call Menu 'RC Management'
in ADRACS:
⇒Control,
⇒File Transfer,
⇒Show RAM Directory All files available?
If necessary, restore the
floppy backup of the *.sit
files.
9.3 Live lamp on Transmitter rack, LC: The LCD The *.sit files are ok.
screen shows "Actual InstallaĆ
tion DVOR 432".
"Maintenance Alert Warning" e.g. the battery at the LCP is Backup data. Replace the
in the LCD screen is indiĆ weak, UBat < 3.2 V . Lithium battery at the LCP.
cated. Call Menu "MainteĆ
nance Data" for more informaĆ
tion.
9.4 No commuĆ The LCP is ok. Indications Interface cable between PC Check cable? Are the origĆ
nication beĆ and controls directly at the and LCP is defective or conĆ inal cable used:
tween PC and LCP are operating, but operaĆ tacts are contaminated. Connector 9-pole, 0-MoĆ
LCP. tion via PC is not possible. dem cable?
Configuration of PC is not ok: Check serial interface port

- Is the correct port used at at PC?
the PC?
- Is any other program Checkprograms.
running at this port?
- ADRACS is missing or Re-load ADRACS if necĆ
damaged? essary.
Ed. 01.04 6-11

DVOR 432

9.5 No interrogaĆ RXDA LED (second from Transmitter and monitor are The LCP interrogates only
tions to monitor above) at the MSP-VD or switched on? processors which are
or transmitter. MSG-C does not sparkle switched on.
regularly (This LED indicates
received interrogations from Check, if 64-pole flat ribbon Replace or fix cables.
LCP to monitor or transmitter). cables from BP-C, connector
X82 to LCP and from BP-C,
connectorX71/TX1(X72/TX2)
to BP-T, connector X70, are
defective or have come loose.
9.5 Both MSP-VD and both The LCP is presumably defecĆ Replace the LCP compleĆ
cont. MSG-C are not interrogated. tive. tely.
At least one MSP-VD and The fault can be located possiĆ Replace first MSP-VD or
MSG-C communicates with bly in the LCP or in the transĆ MSG-C, than LCP (or
the LCP. mitter or monitor subassemĆ LC-CPU) if replacement
blies (MSP or MSG-C) of MSG-C/MSP-VD was
notsuccessful.
6-12 Ed. 01.04

DVOR 432
Operation and Maintenance Repairs
6.2 REPAIRS
6.2.1 General
The repair activities are designed to restore the ready condition of a faulty system in the shortest
possible time. The system is repaired by replacing the defective subassembly. The defective subasĆ
semblies can then be sent to the manufacturer for repair.
NOTE: Subassemblies and components which are sent to the manufacturer for repair or returns
must be packed in a way that no damage of the parts could arise. It is recommended to
use the original packing, e.g. of the spare part, or a comparable packing in corresponding
performance to ensure a safe shipping of defective subassemblies or components.
Handling of subassemblies with electrostatically sensitive components see section
6.2.1.1.3 .
6.2.1.1 Safety precautions
6.2.1.1.1 General regulations
The safety regulations laid down by the local authorities (e.g. concerning accident prevention, work
safety or operation of electronic equipment and navigation systems) must be observed at all times.
The purpose of safety precautions is to protect persons and property, and they must always be heedĆ
ed. See also Part 1, Section 1.4.
Work should not be carried out outside the shelter or on the antenna system during a storm, due to
the danger of injury by lightning.
Station shutdown due to repair and maintenance: The responsible authorities must be notified of any
work which may require operation of the system to be interrupted, in accordance with national regulaĆ
tions.
6.2.1.1.2 Work on the equipment
WARNING
In order to avoid risks to persons and consequential damage to subassemblies, the releĆ
vant transmitter must be switched off. The battery-charged power supply (BCPS) must
always be disconnected from the mains before any work, other than measuring the voltĆ
age is carried out on it. RF cables must not be bent to a radius of less than 50 mm.
Use switch TX1 or TX2 prior to removing or inserting a subassembly or prior to removing a plug-in
connector during the course of repair and maintenance activities (see Section 6.2.3.1 for exceptions).
Switches TX1 and TX2 deactivate the DC converters for the transmitter 1 and transmitter 2 subassemĆ
blies respectively. The subassemblies which are common to both transmitters are exceptions: they
cannot be switched on and off with either TX1 or TX2. Switch NAV deactivates the complete equipĆ
ment.
6.2.1.1.3 Handling Electrostatically Sensitive Subassemblies
The ILS and (D)VOR installations contain subassemblies (plug-in cards) equipped with components
which are sensitive to electrostatic discharge. When replacing subassemblies and plug-in cards
containing electrostatically sensitive components, special precautionary measures should be taken
during removal, transport and installation in order to prevent damage to the components. We refer
to the customer documentation of the manufacturer.
Subassemblies which contain electrostatically sensitive components are

marked with this symbol.
Ed. 01.04 6-13

DVOR 432
Repairs Operation and Maintenance
If any of the maintenance personnel need to touch one of these subassemblies, they should place
both hands flat on a grounded conductive surface for a few seconds to eliminate static charges. The
subassembly can be touched - preferably at an insulator (board edge, lever mechanism, etc.) - as
soon as the potential has been equalized in this manner. It is advisable to avoid touching the contacts
of the plug-in connectors, the conductor paths and the components themselves. Some of the subasĆ
semblies must be left in their antistatic packaging or plastic bags as long as possible. The special
procedures described below should be followed when subassemblies and plug-in boards are
replaced within the framework of repair and maintenance activities, due to the risk of damage to elecĆ
trostatically sensitive components.
To remove a subassembly:
- Switch off the system before beginning the replacement procedure.
- Eliminate any static body charges by touching the frame of the grounded system (rack) with both
hands.
- Remove the subassembly and lay it down on a bench with a grounded conductive worktop.
- Pack the subassembly in an antistatic plastic bag and send it off to the manufacturer for repair.
To install a subassembly:
- Eliminate any static body charges by touching the frame of the grounded system (rack) with both
hands.
- Remove the subassembly from the antistatic plastic bag.
- Install the subassembly.
- Switch on the system again.
6.2.1.1.4 Components containing beryllium oxide ceramics
Some of the subassemblies are equipped with transistors containing beryllium oxide. These transisĆ
tors are in line with the latest state of the art and are in use all over the world. They are absolutely harmĆ
less in a sealed, compact condition. Beryllium oxide dust, which is detrimental to health, may however
be produced if the transistors are opened. They should not be dismantled or shattered. This applies
likewise if they are scrapped or disposed of. The following subassemblies contain power transistors
with beryllium oxide:
- Modulator 110 : Transistor types BLF242, BLF 245

Modulator 110P : Transistor types BLF244, BLF 246
- CA-100C : Transistor type BLF248
6.2.1.1.5 Handling lead batteries
See chapter 5, Section 5.4 ff and Part 1, Section 1.4.
6-14 Ed. 01.04

DVOR 432
6.2.2 Correcting a Processor Standstill
A processor standstill may result when subassemblies are removed under voltage or on account of
static charges which are discharged from the operators to the rack. This condition is always the result
of an operator error. It is therefore advisable to pinpoint the causes as soon as it happens. There are
in fact only four possible causes, though these may occur in combination.
- Insufficient grounding of the rack

- Unsuitable and/or incorrectly cleaned floor covering
- Non-observance of clothing regulations by personnel
- Carelessness of the personnel due to inadequate information.
Any causes determined should be remedied immediately by means of appropriate measures: the
symptom will not then recur. A distinction should be made in case of a processor standstill between
a failure in the keyboard processor and a failure in the equipment central processing unit. Both the
behavior of the system and the measures to be taken are different.
6.2.2.1 Failure in the Monitor Processor

See Fig. 6-1.
The LCP shows MON1 FAULTY or MON2 FAULTY due to to the failed processor on its LCD screen.
If both monitors fail, the transmitter will be shut down.
Remedy:
- Open front door of the rack.

- CPU live lamp on the MSP must be lit.
- If live lamp is off, press reset button on MSP.
- Close door again.
- Perform login and enter password if more commands must be entered, otherwise this step may
be ignored.
The installation is then fully operational again.
6.2.2.2 Failure in the Transmitter Processor

See Fig. 6-1.
If lamps light up on the system in a manner which has no meaning and cannot be interpreted, then
go out again after a short time, then the processor has fallen out of synchronism temporarily on
account of an interference pulse, but has been able to recover. If this symptom is encountered repeatĆ
edly, the causes should be determined. If the transmitter fails on account of a processor standstill,
this is displayed by means of TX1 or TX2 WARNING on the LCP.
Remedy:
- Open front door of the rack.

- CPU live lamp on the MSG-C must be lit.
- If live lamp is off, press reset button on MSG-C.
- Close door again.
- Perform login and enter password if more commands must be entered, otherwise this step may
be ignored.
The installation is then fully operational again.
Ed. 01.04 6-15

DVOR 432
ÊÊ Ê MSP
ÊÊ ÊÊ TXDA lamp
RXDA lamp
CPU live lamp, green
ÊÊ ÊÊ
Modem*
Modem*
Modem*
VAM*
ÊÊ ASU-INT
MSP-1
MSP-2
ÊÊ ÊÊ
--
--
LCP
CSL
pushbutton manual reset
DCC-05
ÊÊ
ÊÊ ÊÊ morse code indication
ÊÊ
earphone jack (voice, ATIS)
ÊÊ
ÊÊ ÊÊ MSG-C
ÊÊ Ê
TXDA lamp, green
MOD-110***
RXDA lamp, green

MOD-110P/
ÊÊ Ê
MOD-110
MOD-110
DCC-MV
MSG-C
MSG-S
ÊÊ ÊÊ
SYN
CCP
ÊÊ
ÊÊ
ÊÊ Ê pushbutton manual reset

MOD-110***
MOD-110P/
MOD-110
MOD-110
DCC-MV
MSG-C
MSG-S
ÊÊ ÊÊ
SYN
CCP
ÊÊ
ÊÊ
ÊÊ ÊÊ
ÊÊ
ËË ËË ËË PMM
ÊÊ
ÊÊ
ËË ËË
ÊÊ
ËË ËË Ê
DCC-28***
DCC-28***
ÊÊ
ËË
ÊÊ ËË ÊÊ
ËË
ÊÊ ËË
ËËËËËË
ÊÊ ËË
ËËËË
ÊÊ
ÊÊ
ÊÊ ËËËË ÊÊ
ËËËË
ACC**
ACC**
ACC**
ACC**
ÊÊ
ÊÊ ËËËË ÊÊ
ÊÊ ËËËË Ê
front side ËËË
* optional
** installed in ASU cabinet with 100 W version ËËË *** 100 W version only
Fig. 6-1 Push buttons and indications on the subassemblies MSP and MSG-C in the rack
6-16 Ed. 01.04

DVOR 432
6.2.3 Replacing Subassemblies
WARNING
The heat sinks of the modulators (MOD-110P) and of the carrier amplifier (CA-100C)
may warm up during operation. This is normal and does not affect the function. When reĆ
placing these subassemblies it is recommended to let them cool down for a while or take
suitable measures (e.g. gloves). When replacing the subassemblies SYN und CCP avoid
touching the heat sinks of the MOD-110P.
6.2.3.1 Disconnecting the Voltage before replacing Subassemblies
CAUTION
The voltage must always be disconnected before removing or installing subassemblies

(subject to only a very few exceptions). It is sufficient to switch off all the transmitter subasĆ
semblies, the DCC-MV and the DCC-28 with either of switches TX1 or TX2 on the PMM
subassembly. The transmitter subassemblies can also be switched off by means of a PC
command.
Before replacing an ACC-module the BCPS must always be disconnected from the
mains.
If a monitor subassembly is affected (MSP-VD), the associated DCC subassemblies
must be removed. It is not necessary to switch them off beforehand with both TX1 and
TX2 on the PMM.
If the CSL must be changed, both TX1 and TX2 must be switched off beforehand.
The VAM, MODEM and the DCC-3-05 subassemblies may be removed and installed
when live. The special design of their contacts prevents damage from occurring.
6.2.3.2 Subassemblies in the Transmitter Rack and Power Supply

The table below lists the work which may be necessary after a subassembly has been replaced.
Please also refer to Sections 6.2.1.1 and 6.2.1.1.3 .
a) The relevant transmitter must be de-energized before removing or installing subassemblies, prefĆ
erably by switching it off on the PMM subassembly. It should be noted that the following subassemĆ
blies are only de-energized if both switches and switch NAV (for CSL) on the PMM are switched
off:
LCP
DCC-3-05
CSL
MSP-VD
VAM
ASU complete (DVOR only)
b) Several of the subassemblies have DIP-FIX switches or jumpers on their pc boards. It is essential
to check that the switches or jumpers on the new subassemblies are set to the same positions as
on the old subassemblies. Section 6.2.4 contains a list of the DIP-FIX switches and jumpers.
c) Check that all the RF cables have been connected correctly before switching the transmitter on
again, and make sure that either the antenna or a dummy load is connected to the transmitter
output signals (CSB, SB1, SB2).
d) All subassemblies in the assembly carrier have plug-in RF connections.
Ed. 01.04 6-17

DVOR 432
Subassemblies of the transmitter rack
Unit to be changed Preparation Adjustments after change

SYN - Adjust station frequency
MOD-110 - check RF level, modulation depths, phasing

MOD-110P - check RF level, modulation depths, phasing
check blending modulation (DVOR)
CA-100 loosen screws, remove cables check output power
CCP - (!) readjustment of transmitter neccessary

with calibrated MSP or external measuring
equipment
RFD/Filter loosen screws, remove cables -
ASU-INT (DVOR) - -
-
MSG-S - (!) adjust or load all transmitter data
MSG-C -
- (!) calibrate monitor

MSP -
CSL - check AGC in MSP
MDS (option)
LCP complete loosen screws, remove cables re-load installation type, configuration, site
LCP, LC-CPU loosen screws, remove cables and PTT file and defined masks (*.mxn), if
necessary
LCP, LCI remove LC-CPU, loosen screws -
VAM - -
Modem LGM 28.8 - -
Modem LGM 1200MD - -
DCC-3-05 - -
DCC-28 loosen screws on front panel -
DCC-MV loosen screws on front panel -
PMM loosen screws, remove cables -
ACC-54 loosen screws on front panel -
Subassemblies of the ASU rack (DVOR only)
Unit to be changed Preparation Adjustments after change

ASC - -
ASM loosen RF cables -
BSG - (!) adjust 9960 Hz mod. depth
MOD-SBB - check blending modulation
DCC-MVD loosen screws on front panel -
Fig. 6-2 Preparation and adjustments during a subassembly replacement
6-18 Ed. 01.04

DVOR 432
6.2.3.2.1 Replacing EPROM
NOTE: Before starting it is recommended to read out all parameters of the installation:
Use command Download Parameters or make a printout of all parameters or write down
manually the indicated parameters if other measures are not possible.
It is also recommended to generate a copy of the specific site files as backup:
- In the PC User Program, click the Control button in the Main Status window.
- Select File Transfer and Copy SITE file to PC in the submenu. Copy all files with the
extension:*.sit, *.oio, *.msk, *.ptt.
The EPROM should always be replaced by qualified personnel only. The following subassemblies
contain EPROM which may need to be replaced: MSG-C, MSP, CSL (test generator). The locations
are shown in Section 6.2.4.
CAUTION
Since the EPROM are electrostatically sensitive components, the following safety precauĆ
tions must always be observed (see also Section 6.2.1.1.3 ): The person replacing the
EPROM should preferably not wear shoes with rubber or plastic soles, and should first
eliminate any static charges by touching the transmitter rack with both hands.
a) Switch off both transmitters: set the TX1 and TX2 switches on the PMM to OFF.
b) Release the MSG-C resp. MSP or CSL with the lever mechanism and remove it from the slide-in
chassis in the rack. Lay the subassembly down on an electronically conductive surface (e.g. on
the special packaging provided).
c) Remove the EPROM:
Identify the EPROM to be replaced by means of its inscription and note its orientation (notch on
one of the narrow sides). Lever the EPROM slowly out of the base by carefully applying a flat,
pointed object (e.g. a screwdriver) to the narrow sides alternately.
d) Fit the new EPROM:
Fit the new EPROM into the empty base in the same position. If the EPROM is swapped from one
unit to another, determine the correct orientation by comparing the two units. Before fitting the
EPROM, check that all the pins are aligned exactly. Press the two rows of pins into the base one
at a time.
e) Reinstall the MSG-C resp. MSP or CSL and lock it in position.
f) Execute the following checks after switching on the transmitter again:
- the live LED must light up (MSG-C, MSP)
- create new EPROM checksum for monitor 1 and 2 (refer to 6.2.3.2.2 ).
- all the transmitter and monitor settings must correspond to test reports.
6.2.3.2.2 Creating new Checksum for MSP EPROM in ADRACS
Change of EPROM on MSP makes it necessary to create a new EPROM checksum:

- Select the station where the EPROM of MSP is changed. The 'Detailed Status' window appears.
- Select in menu Commands the item More Commands.... The 'Commands' dialog window appears.
- Select in menu Monitors the submenu Monitor Miscellaneous. Select the command create EPROM
checksum.
- Click on button program MON 1/2 to create the new checksum.
- Click on button Close to close the 'Commands' window.
Ed. 01.04 6-19

DVOR 432
6.2.3.2.3 Replace and Reconfigure Subassembly LCP

Before starting any replacement it is recommend to read out all parameters of the installation: Use
command Download Parameters or make a printout of all parameters or write down manually the indiĆ
cated parameters if other measures are not possible. It is also recommended to generate a copy of
the specific site files as backup:
- Click the control button in the main status window in the PC User Program.
- Select File Transfer and Copy site file to PC in the submenu.
- Copy all files with the extension:*.sit, *.oio, *.msk, *.ptt.
The LCP subassembly contains routines which allow to check the LCP hardware and to configure
the LCP to the system ILS 420 or CVOR/DVOR.
The spare subassembly LCP is not configured to a specific subsystem (i.e. ILS 420 or CVOR/DVOR).
This is to be done restarting the subsystem with power on:
a) To start the special function menu press buttons 1 and 4 simultaneously on the LCP immediately
after power on and hold pressed until screen of LCP contains menu information.
b) Select one of the upcoming menu points, here for DVOR 432: Configure DVOR 432. The LCP copĆ
ies, renames or deletes some files according to the selected systems. This menu point does not
appear again when the selection has been done once.
Finishing this procedure the LCP is ready. Further configuration is to be done with the ADRACS user
program.
LCP Control Menu Factory use only:
ALARM used for factory test

S1 Test the LCP board used to delete bad or wrong
S2 Delete drive d: .sit-files on drive d: of LCP
WARNING S3 Restore REU.exe saving reu.exe update REU
S4 Secure REU.exe firmware
S1+S2 not used in CVOR
NORMAL S1+S3 Configure DVOR 432 select LCP use
S1+S2 Exit to DOS Exit control menu to standard
REMOTE
LOCAL
MAINTENANCE
control buttons (S) 1 2 3 4
Fig. 6-3 LCP front panel and LCP control menu
6.2.3.3 DVOR antenna
A large number of settings must usually be remade after replacing the DVOR CSB-antenna or a SB-
antenna or the DVOR monitor dipole. If the DVOR CSB-antenna or more then two side by side alloĆ
cated SB-antennas are replaced, a special flight test is also necessary.
6-20 Ed. 01.04

DVOR 432
6.2.4 List of DIP-FIX-Switches and Jumpers
6.2.4.1 General
Some of the subassemblies have DIP-FIX switches or jumpers on the component side. The jumpers
act either as on/off switches or as changeover switches. The DIP-FIX switches and jumpers can be
set or placed to particular positions in order to adapt universal subassemblies to specific equipment
types. Other switches or jumpers must be actuated for test and maintenance purposes, or in case
of interconnection with a DME. Under normal climatic conditions it is not necessary to solder the
DIP-FIX switches in their limit positions.
NOTE: Before installing a spare subassembly check and correct if necessary position of the DIP-
FIX switches and jumpers.
Overview of subassemblies containing DIP-FIX switches and jumpers:
No. Subassembly Short name Reference number

1 Control and Selector Logic CSL 83135 23100
2 Modulation Signal Generator Control MSG-C 83135 27200
3 Monitor Signal Processor MSP-VD 83135 22300

MSP-VD 83135 22301*
MSP-D 83135 22400
4 Local Control Panel LCP:

- Local Control Interface LCI 83135 21301
- Local Control CPU LC-CPU 83135 21402
5 Voice amplifier VAM 83131 71701
6 Backpanel Transmitter BP-T 58351 00210
* Replaces 83135 22300 and 83135 22400.
Overview of DVOR ASU-rack subassemblies containing DIP-FIX switches and jumpers:
No. Subassembly Short name Reference number

6 Antenna Switch Control, Doppler ASC-D 83131 70612
7 Blending Signal Generator BSG-D 83131 70611
NOTE: The position of the DIP-FIX switches and jumpers for the modem subassemblies will be
found in the Technical Manual for Remote Control RCSE-443 (Ref.No. 83140 5 5322).
Ed. 01.04 6-21

DVOR 432
6-22 Ed. 01.04

DVOR 432
X14
V33
X13
S4
S3
V34
S2
S1 EPROM
S6 D10
V28
X17* X15
EPROM
V27 D9 X24X23
X12
X11
ASSOC.
X5
X6
X7
X8
S5
IND.
3 2 1
2
X3 X25
user defined
X4 voltage adjust optionally to
X19,20,21
X19 between 1.7 to 1.875 X26
X20 X18
X21 R X22
P3 P4
set open set * set with ILS

open
1 2 3
SWITCH POSITION DEFINITION REMARKS

S1, S3 key Manual switch off TX1 or TX2
S2, S4 key Manual switch on TX1 or TX2
S5 lower Independent, DME = Master (2-3, 5-6) Slide switch for DME/TACAN-
identity interface, depends on
upper Associated, AN400 = Master (1-3, 4-6) installation
S6 0...F Test signal select
JUMPER POSITION DEFINITION REMARKS
X7,X8,X11 Signal definition and drive select Morse code signal for DME
X7, X8 1-2 positive logic: device on = current flow Normal operation
2-3 negative logic: device on = no current flow

X5,X6,X12 Signal definition and drive select to DME: Station Operational
X5, X6 1-2 positive logic: device on = current flow Normal operation
2-3 negative logic: device on = no current flow

X9,X10 not existing
X11, X12 1-2 Drive using Darlington current source Normal operation
2-3 Drive using optocoupler only

1 Control and Selector Logic (CSL) 83135 23100 1 of 2
Ed. 01.04 6-23

DVOR 432

X13 set Switch off line TX1 from LCP default setting
open Interrupt Switch off line TX1 from LCP

X14 set Switch off line TX2 from LCP default setting
open Interrupt Switch off line TX2 from LCP

X15 set Line OP_IN- from DME default setting
open Interrupt line OP_IN- from DME

X16 not existing
X17 set Test signal selection, ILS default setting ILS
open Test signal selection, VOR/DVOR default setting (D)VOR

X18 set Enabling cutoff for over-discharge protection Emergency battery operation
open without over-discharge protection Operation without emergency

battery or function disabled
X19,29,21 Selection of battery type/cell voltage only one jumper set simultan.!
X19 set battery switch off at 1,7 V/cell alternate to X20, X21
open
X20 set battery switch off at 1,8 V/cell alternate to X19, X21
open
X21 set battery switch off at 1,875 V/cell default setting
open
X22 set enabling automatic restore with PMM-5 and (D)VOR
(power management)
open - with PMM-5 and ILS
X23 set no monitor fault monitoring MON2
open monitor fault monitoring MON2 default setting

X24 set no monitor fault monitoring MON1
open monitor fault monitoring MON1 default setting

X25 1-2 DME-Status is transmitted via remote contr.
depends on DME-Interface
2-3 DME-Status is transmitted via signalling line
OP_IN+ and OP_IN-
X26 set On/off line to optocoupler interface of BCPS Default setting
from LCP via CSL closed (Power Management)
open On/off line to optocoupler interface of BCPS depends on installation

from LCP via CSL open, e.g. if no emergency
battery exists
1 Control and Selector Logic (CSL) 83135 23100 2 of 2
6-24 Ed. 01.04

DVOR 432
X7
- + -
X8 X4
battery 3.6 V
V2
V3
X6
3 2 1
EPROM
D8
EPROM
D7
X5
3 2 1
S1
V4
set open set

open
1 2 3

X4 set watch-dog fault triggers NMI
(Non Maskable Interrupt)
open NMI function disabled default setting

X5 2-3 EPROM type 27C040 default setting
1-2 EPROM type 27C020

X6 1-2 RAM type 628128 default setting
2-3 RAM-Typ 628512

X7 set backup battery switched on default setting
open backup battery switched off

X8 set multiple reset disabled, if watch dog fails
open multiple reset enabled default setting

2 Modulation Signal Generator Control (MSG-C) 83135 27200
Ed. 01.04 6-25

DVOR 432
X5 X6
V2 1 2 3 1 2 3
V3
V1 X7 EPROM
D7
EPROM
X22 X8 D8
S1
- + -
battery 3.6 V
* P16 X28
V4
**
X12 X3
X25
set open set

open
1 2 3 * factory adjustment **not assembled on 83135 22301

X3 for factory adjustment only, a solder strip is inserted
onto the soldering side after adjustment
X5 1-2 EPROM type 27C020 or 27C040
2-3 EPROM type 27C040 with complete decoding default setting

X6 1-2 RAM type 628128 default setting
2-3 RAM-Typ 628512

X7 set the RAM is battery buffered, i.e. the system parameter, default setting
alarm storage and operating hours are maintained
after system switch off
open RAM is not battery buffered, i.e. the above mentioned

data will be lost after system switch off
X8 set multiple reset disabled, if watch dog timer fails
open multiple reset enabled default setting

X12 audio socket for listening to voice signals e.g. station
identity, meteorological data (ATIS)
3 Monitor Signal Processor (MSP-VD) 83135 22300/22301 1 of 2
6-26 Ed. 01.04

DVOR 432

X22 set watch dog fault triggers NMI, i.e. when the
processor has a fail function, the processor
monitoring circuit leaves out one interrupt
open NM function disabled default setting

X25 feed in point for GND
X28 set default setting
open factory adjustment

3 Monitor Signal Processor (MSP-VD) 83135 22300/22301 2 of 2
NOTE: For the Monitor Signal Processor MSP-D (83135 22400) the position of DIF-FIX switĆ
ches and jumpers is similar to MSP-VD (83135 22300) position.
The MSP-VD (C,D), Ref. Nr. 83135 22301, replaces ...22300 and ...22400.
Ed. 01.04 6-27

DVOR 432
OIO-IN
LC-CPU COM5 CSL, COM9..10 OIO-OUT DME/NDB COM1...7
X8,9,11..14
X37
X38
X39
DME/NDB
X34 X33
S1
X6 X2 X51 X52 X1
876543 21 * *
OFF
ON
1
optionally, normally not assembled
CPU X84 X83 X82 X81 1

X60 board B1 A1
RS422 only RS422/485
1
1 1
B10 X99 B1
X48 LCI rear DME/NDB
1 A1
PC-1
X15 COM4 Key lock Power COM8
X35 Supply
X16...23 X50
+ *
X95 R1
X5
B10 B1
1
X5 X6 X7 X8 X9
1
X4
Battery X41 local
A1
2 GND
3.6 V 3 lock
X4 1
0.8 Ah H1 Brightness
X36
1 COM3
Life LED X24
-15 V +5 V DGND
1 1 X100*
S2 X10* X53* X25...32 1
X55 X56 X54
Keyboard Printer Ethernet
Reset CPU
3 RS422/485
recessed opening
in LC-CPU board
RS232
1 RS232
COM3 2 TTL
* optional 3 RS422/
1
2
X9 RS485 X81 to 84
X32
X31
X30
X29
X28
X27
X26
X25
IAUX set to
1 X11 GND +5V ext.
2
set X12 B1 A1 B1 A1
3 open COM5 X13 B2 A2 B2 A2

1 RS232
B3 A3 B3 A3
X14 2 TTL
set COM4 B4 A4 B4 A4
X8 3 RS422/ B5 A5 B5 A5
open RS485
RS485 RS422
X23
X22
X21
X20
X19
X18
X17
X16
B6 A6 B6 A6

bank X81 A1-B1/B2-B3 IAUX14 active low default setting
B1-B2/A3-B3 IAUX14 active high
A4-B4/B5-B6 IAUX15 active low default setting



4 Local Control Panel (LCP: LC-CPU/LCI) 83135 21402 / 83135 21301 1 of 3
6-28 Ed. 01.04

DVOR 432


X95 A1-B1, ... , A8-B8 serial port3 set to RS232 Port 3 (COM3)
X25...X32 1-2
X24, X41 not used -

X95 B1-B2, B3-B4 ,B5-B6, B7-B8 serial port3 set to TTL
X25/26 2-2
X27/28 2-2
X29/30 2-2
X31/32 2-2
X24, X41 not used -

X95 A1-B1, ... , A8-B8 serial port3 set to RS422
X25...X32 2-3
X24 2-3 full duplex default setting

X41 open -
X25...32 2-3
X24 1-2 half duplex default; signal RTS controls

TX enable in UART mode
X41 set adds 100 W termination
X99 A1-B1, ... , A8-B8 serial port4 set to RS232 Port 4 (COM4)
X16...23 1-2
X15, X40 not used -

X99 B1-B2, B3-B4 ,B5-B6, B7-B8 serial port4 set to TTL
X16/17 2-2
X18/19 2-2
X20/21 2-2
X22/23 2-2
X15, X40 not used -

X16...23 2-3

X40 open -
X16...23 2-3

Ed. 01.04 6-29

DVOR 432

X38,39 open serial port5 set to RS232 Port 5 (COM5)
X9,11...14 1-2
X8/X37 not used -

X38,39 open serial port5 set to RS422
X9,11...14 2-3

X37 open -
X38,39 set serial port5 set to RS485
X9,11...14 2-3

X33 open serial port1 set to RS232, IRQ14 pathed to CPU

interrupt path
set not used
X34 set serial port5 set to RS232, IRQ6 pathed to CPU
RS422/485, interrupt path
open for ext. device test
X35 set watch dog on if enabled by software
open watch dog off

X36 set battery backup enabled used for RTC on CPU
open battery backup disabled RTC not buffered

S1 input register 6 Bit 4...7: (optional assembly)
S1/8 on Bit 4 to GND Bypass not auto-disabled

off - default setting
S1/7 on Bit 5 to GND not used
off - default setting
off - TX1 ON, Status
off - TX2 ON, Status
S1/1 to 4 off IN0...IN3 always off, on not allowed
LCI rear
X5 1-2 Font select: 40 characters default setting
2-3 Font select: 30 characters
X6 1-2 Font select: per HW (X5) default setting
2-3 Font select: per SW
X7 1-2 Display allways on default setting
2-3 Display off/on per SW
X8 1-2 spare default setting
2-3 not used
X9 1-2 Buzzer on default setting
2-3 Buzzer off
6-30 Ed. 01.04

DVOR 432
S4
R33
S2
S3
S1
4
2 1
On/Off switch Change-over switch
DIP-FIX POSITION DEFINITION REMARKS

SWITCH
S1, S2, S3 on signal path closed normal operation
off signal path opened between filĆ factory adjustment

ters for measurement
S4 2-1 signal path closed normal operation
2-4 signal path opened for comparaĆ factory adjustment

tor test
5 Voice Amplifier (VAM), option 83131 71701
Ed. 01.04 6-31

DVOR 432
ÊÊ ÊÊ
Ê Ê
X87 X86 X79 X78
X85 X82
X94 X93 X92
ÊÊ ÊÊ
X80
X99 X98 X97 X96 X77 X76 X84

X73
ÊÊ ÊÊ
BP-C X74
X83
X95 -3 - 1
X72 X71 -4 - 2 1 1
Ê Ê
50W TX2
2 2
100W 3 3 TX1
ÊÊ ÊÊ
X84 X81
1 1
50W TX2
2 2
100W TX1
Ê Ê
3 3
X70 X82
BP-T X71 X84 X83
Ê Ê
X81
1
X83 TX2
(TX1) X72 2
ÊÊ ÊÊ
X85 X82 TX1 3
X80
X85
1
TX2
2
Setting example: 100 W, TX1
TX1
ÊÊ ÊÊ
3
CA-100/1* 1 1
X80 50W TX2
2 2
100W 3 3 TX1
ÊÊ ÊÊ
X84 X81
X70
BP-T X71 X84
X81 50W
1 1
TX2
2 2
X83 TX1
X72 100W 3 3
(TX2)
ÊÊ ÊÊ
X85 X82
X80 X83 X82
1 1
TX2 TX2
2 2
TX1 3 TX1 3
Ê Ê
X85
X80 Setting example: 100 W, TX2

* 100 W only
Jumper POSITION DEFINITION REMARKS

X80 1-2 TX2 Definition of TX1 or TX2
2-3 TX1
X84, X83 1-2 50W Settings for 50 W, TX1
X85 2-3 TX1
X81 2-3 TX1
X82 2-3 TX1
X85 2-3 TX1
X81 2-3 TX1
X82 2-3 TX1
X85 1-2 TX2
X81 1-2 TX2
X82 1-2 TX2
X84,X83 2-3 100W Settings for 100 W, TX2
X85 1-2 TX2
X81 1-2 TX2
X82 1-2 TX2
6 Backpanel Transmitter (BP-T) 58351 00210
6-32 Ed. 01.04

DVOR 432
S1
4
2 1

SWITCH
S1 off not used in AN 400 no control via processor posĆ
sible. Decoders and counters
are always enabled.
on normal operation, control via processor posĆ

for test purposes and ground sible. Decoders and counters
check can be controlled via procesĆ
sor.
6 Antenna Switch Control, Doppler (ASC-D) 83131 70612
Ed. 01.04 6-33

DVOR 432
S8
S7
S6
S5
S4
S13
S3
S2
S1
S15
S14
S19 S20
S18
4
2 1

SWITCH
S1 to S8 closed Switches S1 to S8 define logic Normal operation:
level at address counter ("0" if
switch closed, "1" if open) with aid S1 to S8 closed = 0° phase
of resistance network R1. Zero shift.
crossings of sine and cosine funcĆ
tions can be shifted in relation to
the 750 Hz frequency over the enĆ
tire 180° frequency range in steps
of 0.7° (180°/ 28 ).
Individual phase values with open For test purposes
switches in degrees:
S1 open 0,7
S2 open 1,4
S3 open 2,8
S4 open 5,6
7 Blending Signal Generator (BSG-D) 83131 70611 1 of 2
6-34 Ed. 01.04

DVOR 432

SWITCH
S5 open 11,2
S6 open 22,4
S7 open 44,8
S8 open 89,6
S13 2-4 normal operation
2-1 For test purposes in conjunction

with S1 to S8.
S14 / S15 open / open normal operation
S14 / S15 closed / open jcos (x) j und Correction possibility for 1.5
j sin (x)j kHz noise spectrum in the
9960 Hz signal
S14 / S15 open / closed j0,8 cos (x) + 0,2 cos@ (x)j und Correction possibility for 1.5
j0,8 sin (x) + 0,2 sin@ (x)j kHz noise spectrum in the
9960 Hz signal
S14 / S15 closed / closed Calls test functions stored in Test mode (according to SecĆ
EPROM IC4. tion
4.4 Check of decoupling beĆ
tween sideband antennas)
S18 2-1 normal operation
2-4 Test of stability of phase control
S19,S20 on normal operation
off Feedback paths (Z1, Z2) can be inĆ

terrupted for test purposes.
7 Blending Signal Generator (BSG-D) 83131 70611 2 of 2
Ed. 01.04 6-35

DVOR 432
6-36 Ed. 01.04

Annex Nextfield DVOR 432
Operation and Maintenance General
Annex
DVOR Nextfield Monitoring

Installation and Alignment Procedure
Ed. 01.04 A

DVOR 432 Annex Nextfield
Table of effective pages

Basic edition: 01.02 / Revised edition: 01.04
Pages Ed.-No. Remarks
A to B 01.04
AN-1 to 44 01.04
Trademarks Microsoft and MS-DOS are registered trademarks, WINDOWS is a trademark of the Microsoft Corporation. IBM is a registered trademark of the
International Business Corporation. Pentium is a registered trademark of the Intel Corporation.
B Ed. 01.04

CHAPTER 1
INSTALLATION AND ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE
This Annex describes the installation of the DVOR nextfield dipoles and the settings for the nextfield
monitoring during first alignment of the DVOR installation.
1.1 PREREQUISITES
The DVOR antenna system is completely installed.
WARNING
Sturdy shoes, safety gloves and safety helmets must be worn during installation. Safety
belts with rescue line and swivel snaphook should be used when working on the counterĆ
poise platform.
1.2 INSTALLATION OF NEXTFIELD DIPOLES
See Fig. 1-1, 1-2.
To install the nextfield dipoles on the counterpoise the following parts are required.
- GFK mast tube (approx. 3 m length)
- 2 clamps with nuts and screws
- Nextfield dipole with clamping band fastening
- Monitor cable
- Cable conduit with fastenings
- Cable ties, UV resistant
The nextfield dipoles are installed as far as possible at the counterpoise edge. The nextfield dipoles
are fixed each on a GFK mast tube, which is mounted with clamps at the outer supports of the counterĆ
poise.
NOTE: The distance between middle antenna and the nextfield dipoles must not fall below 11 m.
Favorable are values between 12.5 and 17 m. If several dipoles are installed, the dipoles
must have the same distance each ±0,2 m to the middle antenna, because all monitor
inputs use the same gain control (AGC).
The signal quality depends not only on the installation site of the antenna, but also on the
transmitting frequency. Therefore the signals which are processed in the monitor have to
be checked during adjustment. In this way bad signals due to an unfavorable antenna
location may be noticed. As far as good signals are obtained, it may be varied from the
above mentioned antenna position.
The azimuth position of the nextfield dipole (or several dipoles) is optionally selectable. The user can
determine with the project engineer, where a nextfield dipole shall stand. The alarm limits are set acĆ
cording to this position on the PC. Practically special angle ranges, e.g. the approach direction, are
preferred monitored. The mounting position shall be oriented due to the fastening possibilities on the
outer supports of the counterpoise.
nextfield dipole
A51 A1
1800 mm
middle antenna sideband antenna
Counterpoise
Fig. 1-1 Height position of nextfield dipole
Ed. 01.04 AN-1

1.2.1 Mounting on the Counterpoise

See Fig. 1-2.
Mount the nextfield dipole(s) after determination of mounting position as follows:
- At the mounting position fasten the dipole mast made of insulating material (GFK-mast tube) with
clamps (distance 800 mm) to the outer counterpoise support so that approx. 1000 mm of its
over all length is below the counterpoise. If the mesh size is not sufficiently wide at the mounting
position it must be enlarged by cutting open the mesh appropriately at the mounting position.
- Assemble the nextfield dipole with its clamping band fastening to the GFK-mast tube so that the
bottom edge of the nextfield dipole radome is in a height of approx. 1800 mm (±100 mm) above
the counterpoise. Secure the clamping band fastening of the dipole against twisting, e.g. by fixing
with a self-tapping screw to the GFK-mast tube.
- Mount the cable conduit with associated fastenings below the counterpoise. The conduit leads to
the U-girder in the center of the counterpoise.
- Starting from nextfield dipole position mount low loss Cellflex cable (1/4") or adequate RF-tight
cable in the cable conduit and run it downwards the U-girder via the cable box to the connecting
plate at the shelter. On the other side run cable upwards the GFK-mast tube to the nextfield dipole
and connect it to the dipole connector. Fix cable with cable ties to the GFK-mast tube.
Counterpoise
Nextfield dipole (radome)

Tapping screw
clamping band fastening
cable ties
Monitor cable
Mesh opening 1800 mm
cable conduit
Monitor cable
mast tube clamps

800 mm
1000 mm
GFK-mast tube Fixing of cable conduit
Counterpoise support
Fig. 1-2 Nextfield dipole on DVOR counterpoise
AN-2 Ed. 01.04

1.2.2 Connections at Transmitter Rack
See Fig. 1-3, 1-4.
The system cabling with the addition for nextfield dipoles is shown in Fig. 1-4.
Make the following cable connections from transmitter rack to the connecting plate inside the shelter:
Transmitter Rack Cable No. Shelter Cable No. Nextfield Dipole

MON4 Nextfield 1 W84 Connect. plate W64 1
MON3 Nextfield 2 W83 Connect. plate W63 2
MON2 Not used W82 Connect. plate W62 3 (optional)
MON1 Field dipole W81 Connect. plate W61 4 (field dipole, also mobile)
NOTE: The installation is phased during first alignment with a fixed installed or mobile field dipole.
The field dipole is connected to monitor input MON1.
Transmitter Rack
(D)VOR (D)VOR
SB1
LGM1 Local PC ASU DIAGNOSIS DME-IDENT
CSB
LGM2/DME LGM3/NDB VAM ANALOG OIO LCP IN OIO LCP OUT
DVOR
CVOR MON4 MON3 MON2 MON1
DVOR
CVOR
SB2
BCPS MON1 MON2 MON3 MON4 MON5 MON6 MON7 MON8
rear side
Nextfield 1 Nextfield 2 Nextfield 3 Field dipole 1

optional
Fig. 1-3 DVOR transmitter rack, top view, connectors
Ed. 01.04 AN-3

AN-4 Ed. 01.04

A2 A4 A6 A8 A10 A12 A14 A16 A18 A20 A22 A24 A26 A28 A30 A32 A34 A36 A38 A40 A42 A44 A46 A48 A50
J3 J1 J4
3
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
Nextfield dipole (optional) NOTE: The sideband antennas are connected via the matcher module (connector X1,X2);
W62 A51
optionally the decoupling module (connector X1, X2,X3, X4) and the coupling cablesd are available.
Field dipole
A1 A3 A5 A7 A9 A11 A13 A15 A17 A19 A21 A23 A25 A27 A29 A31 A33 A35 A37 A39 A41 A43 A45 47 A49
J3 J1 J4
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
W61
SHELTER W81 24029 28373 W64

2
W82 24029 28373 W63
W83 24029 28373 W62
W84 24029 28373 W61
4 m ±10 cm. RG 223 U W64
TNC-female
W53 27288 03878 W51 27288 03808 W151
W1 W101 Nextfielddipoles 1+2
W54 27288 03878
W2 W102 1
W52 27288 03878
27288 03806
...
...
W57 24009 28159 ASU interface W49 W149
W58 24009 28162 BCPS-control line W50 W150

W63
ASU
W72 24036 28027
BCPS
BCPS
ASU
CSB
SB2
SB1
CSB
MON 1
MON 2
MON 3
MON 4
SB1
SB2
Nextfield 2
Nextfield 1
Field dipole
optional
connecting plate
48VP2 ASU power supply C-bar
ASU+
...
48VP2
ASU+ NAV+ TX1/TX2
ASU RACK
TRANSMITTER RACK to monitor dipoles
NAV+ W61 24039 28226
NAV- GND
PMM/PMM-5 FUSE BOX
W63 24039 28228
GND NAV-
C-bar F1 BFUSE W69 24039 28234 50 A1
2 4 23 to antenna A51 X2
50 A DC
BFUSE W71 24039 28235 X1
W60 24039 28225 1 3 24
0.2 A F2 to antennas A1 to A50 Legend:

W64 24039 28229 BAT2 W70 24039 28234 Matcher Module
N
1 2
W65 24039 28230 BAT1 W67 24039 28232
BAT0 3 4 A1
24039 28231 W68 24039 28233 X2
W66 5 6
Mains distribution box
TNC
X4* X1 X3*
8x 6 V
W73 BSE Option:
BFUSE
BFUSE
BFUSE
BFUSE
W62
W74
NAV-
NAV+
+
NAV-
NAV+
-
BAT-
BAT+
BAT+
BAT-
AF
BAT0
BAT1
BAT2
BAT0
BAT1
BAT2
BSE 24039 28227

Decoupling Module
PE
L3
24039 28068
N
24039 28052 48 V
BCPS Connection Plate battery box BCPS Connection Plate * Coupling cables and connectors in combination with
with DVOR installations with 50 W versions with DVOR installations with 100 W versions optional decoupling module only
Fig. 1-4 System cabling DVOR 432 with nextfield monitoring option
Ed. 01.04 AN-5

CHAPTER 2
CHAPTER 3
For Chapter numbering only!
Ed. 01.04 L-1

General Operation and Maintenance
L-2 Ed. 01.04

Operation and Maintenance Alignment Procedure
CHAPTER 4
ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE WITH NEXTFIELD DIPOLES
The alignment procedure of a DVOR including prerequisites is described in a step by step manner
starting with 4.1. The following list is a summary and also a detailed table of contents.
4.1 PREREQUISITES
4.1.2 Recommended Measurement Equipment
4.1.3 Installation
4.2.2 Switching On
4.2.4 Use of Main Menu Items and Adjustment Masks
4.2.6 Special Notes to DVOR with Nextfield Monitor
4.3.2 Test Set-Up (recommended)
4.4 CHECK OF DECOUPLING BETWEEN SIDEBAND ANTENNAS
4.4.1 Test Set-Up
4.5.1 Preparations (not applicable with Nextfield)
4.6.3 Setting and Check of Monitor 2
4.7 RECORDING OF SIMULATOR ERROR CURVE
4.8.1 Monitor 1
4.8.2 Monitor 2
4.10 SETTING OF NEXTFIELD MONITOR
4.10.1 Setting of Monitor 1
4.11.2 TX1 Main
4.11.3 TX2 Main
Ed. 01.04 AN-7

Alignment Procedure Operation and Maintenance
4.12 FLIGHT CHECK
4.13 RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN THE MONITOR DISPLAY OF THE RF LEVEL AND THE POWER
AN-8 Ed. 01.04

This chapter is a step by step field alignment procedure to be used with the nextfield monitoring opĆ
tion. It assumes that the transmitter cabinet has been factory aligned and tested.
A standard or Laptop PC is used to perform locally the first alignment of the installation. The PC should
meet the following requirements:
- Processor Pentium 90 or better (IBM PC/AT compatible)
- 32 MB RAM, VGA adapter, CD-ROM drive
- min. 10 MB free disk space on HDD
- VGA color monitor (min. resolution 800 x 600 pixels)
- Control via mouse or comparable
- one serial interface connector (RS232)
- any 32-Bit version of Microsoft Windows operating system
Usually suitable PC equipment is already available at site. Otherwise it can be delivered on request
as an option. The ADRACS operating software for the different NAV systems must be installed on the
PC system. The adjustment of the transmitter and monitor parameters is performed via this PC using
the corresponding data window. First the ADRACS software should be installed on the available PC.
For installation procedure refer to Section 1.4 of Technical Manual ADRACS (Ref. No. 83140 55324).
4.1.2 Recommended Measuring Equipment
- 1 Multimeter
- 1 Scope (dual trace)
- 1 Thruline power meter with 1 W, 10 W and 100 W probes, range of frequency 108...118 MHz
- 1 Attenuator 20 dB, 1 W; 1 Directional coupler
- 1 RF cable, approx. 8...10 m; 1 RF cable, 30 m
- Various adapters N-TNC and measuring cables
- 1 Decoupling probe
- 1 mobile/portable monitor dipole with approx. 200 m connection cable*
* (alternative if available on site a portable VOR measuring receiver may be used)
- 1 Antenna simulator (only available in Thales ATM testing area and in training center).
4.1.3 Installation
Before operation, the system must complete as follows:
- Transmitter and ASU cabinet, installed
- Power supply, installed
- Batteries, installed
- Antenna system and
- Monitor dipole, installed and cabling complete.
- Mains voltage must be in accordance with assigned input voltage range of BCPS
(nominal 115 to 230 VAC).
- Cabinet has to be fully equipped with all plug-in units.
- Jumpers and DIP-FIX switches of the pertinent pc boards (refer also to Part 2, chapter 6, section
6.2.4) have to be in accordance with the system version. To enable battery backup on specific pc
boards refer to 4.2.1.1.
- The ADRACS software has been loaded to PC (refer to 4.1.1).
Ed. 07.03
01.04 AN-9

If the alignment is carried out with an antenna simulator instead of the antenna system proceed as
follows:
- Connect the 50 sideband-cables of ASU to the inputs of the Antenna-Simulator, whereby antenĆ
na output No. 1 is to be connected to socket W1 etc.
- Arrange simulator setup according to Fig. 4-5.
- Carry out the alignment of DVOR 432 transmitter and monitor as described in the following, how-
ever Sections 4.3, 4.4, 4.8.1.6, 4.8.1.9, 4.8.1.10 and 4.12 have to be omitted.
AN-10 Ed. 01.04

- Mains off
- Battery fuse switches open (used for emergency battery, battery fuse box, shelter)
- POWER-switches on BCPS (ACC modules, transmitter cabinet) in position OFF
- PMM: switches NAV, TX1, TX2 (transmitter cabinet) in position OFF

Individual jumpers have to be set before the first switching on. These are concerned with the enabling
of backup batteries for non volatile memory (LCP, MSP-VD/1,2, MSG-C/1,2) and the emergency
battery management (CSL). The location of jumpers is shown in Part 2, chapter 6, section 6.2.4:
- LCP: Set jumper X36 (enabling backup battery for RTC).
- MSP-VD (MSP-D): Set jumper X7 on both boards (enabling backup battery).
- MSG-C: Set jumper X7 on both boards (enabling backup battery).
- CSL: Set jumper X18 (enabling cutoff for over discharge protection of emergency battery).
- CSL: Set jumper X22 (enabling automatic restore).
- CSL: Select minimal battery voltage with jumper X19,20,21 for standard over discharge protection.
4.2.2 Switching On
a) Connect PC serial interface connector (e.g. COM1) to connector Local PC on top of the cabinet
using an interface cable (zero modem cable).
b) Switch on mains and set POWER-switches of BCPS (ACC modules, cabinet) to position ON.
c) Close battery fuse switches (battery fuse box, inside shelter).
d) Set switches TX1/TX2 on PMM (cabinet, front side) to position ON.
e) Set main switch NAV on PMM (cabinet, front side) to position ON. During initialization of the LCP
a buzzer signal is set.
f) Switch to local control with the key-lock switch on the Local Control Interface (LCI).

a) Switch on the PC and run WINDOWS.
NOTE: Installation and use of the PC User Program is described in the Technical Manual
ADRACS (chapter 1, sect. 1.4 Installation, chapter 2, Functions), more details on set up
of NAV installation is given in section 1.5 of ADRACS manual. It is recommended to beĆ
come familiar with the menus of ADRACS before performing the first set up procedure.
b) Click Start button, select Programs, program group Adracs Remote Controlling, program Adracs
Remote Controlling Software. The 'Adracs - Select Configuration' window appears.
c) Click on configuration type 'STANDARD' or on predefined configuration type and confirm with OK
button. The Main Status window of ADRACS appears.
Ed. 07.03
01.04 AN-11

d) Perform login procedure at the PC. Acknowledge "User1, Level 5" with OK button.
e) Click on screen button Control in the Main Status window. The 'RC Management' window appears.
f) Click on pulldown menu File Transfer. Select command Copy PC File to RAM.
g) Copy configuration files (*.sit, *.lke, *.ptt, *.oio) from PC to the site.
Service activity only: Copy activities mask files for the first setup (*.mxn) from PC to site.
h) Click command Reset Site of menu File Transfer to activate entered files and data.
NOTE: The Adracs Remote Controlling Software is closed due to the reset. It has to be restarted
manually.
i) Run ADRACS again. Perform Login.
k) Click screen button Control in the Main Status window.
l) Select DateTimeREU in 'RC Management' window. Enter date and time in 'Date&Time REU' winĆ
dow and confirm with button SetNew. Close 'Date&Time REU' window. Proceed with 4.2.5 c) or
m)Logout from ADRACS by clicking on Logout button in 'RC Management' wndow and then click
on Exit button. The ADRACS application is closed.
4.2.4 Use of Main Menu Items and Adjustment Masks
From the Main Menu in ADRACS program the items Commands (C) and Activities (A) are used in the
alignment procedure of the first setup. Following activities masks are available, composed of different
data sets (listed in section 4.3 of Technical Manual ADRACS, Ref. No. 83140 55324):
- Configuration (CF) - Error Curve (EC)
- Antenna Adjustment (AA) - Alarm Limits M1 (AL1)
- Test Generator (TG) - Alarm Limits M2 (AL2)
- TX1 settings (TS) - Battery/BCPS (BAT)
- Monitor Calibration (MC) - Flight Check2 (FC)
NOTE: These activities are designed for DVOR setup without nextfield option. For nextfield option use stanĆ
dard masks of the ADRACS program.
a) Run Adracs Remote Controlling Software, see section 4.2.3, steps a) to c).
b) Perform login procedure at the PC.
c) Click on screen button select in the DVOR status field. The 'Detailed Status' window appears.
d) Select menu Commands. Click on commands Switch both TX ON and Set both MON Bypass ON.
e) Select menu Activities in Main menu and select activities mask 'Configuration'.
f) Enter station type, station frequency and identity morse code for both transmitters and monitors
in the TX1/2 and MON1/2 window.
g) Verify that the MON1/2-window single channel mode is off.
h) Select menu Commands. Click on command Switch both TX OFF.
AN-12 07.03
Ed. 01.04

4.2.6 Special Notes to DVOR with Nextfield Monitor
4.2.6.1 Switching On and Setting of DVOR with Nextfield Monitor
The nextfield monitor monitors the radiated DVOR-signal from its position at the edge of the counterĆ
poise. The signal however is not equivalent to the farfield and is not suitable for phasing of the installaĆ
tion. The 9960 Hz modulation depth is determined from two signals with an individual AGC each. It
can be set correctly only in the monitor if it is correctly in the signal in space.
During first alignment it is therefore recommended to phase the installation with the monitor signal
of a mobile or fixed field dipole. Here, the modulation depth of the 9960 Hz is also to be set. After this
alignment the mobile field dipole can be dismantled. The fine adjustment of the 9960 Hz modulation
depth is performed during flight check. If due to the geographical position of the DVOR installation,
e.g. on a mountain, a normal field dipole cannot be installed the phasing and setting of the 9960 Hz
modulation depth is performed during flight check only.
NOTE: The carrier antenna has very carefully to be adjusted for a good RF matching. A directional
coupler is inserted in the RF line to the carrier antenna, which couples out the sideband
signals, USB and LSB, which are received from the sideband antennas, and supplies it
to the subassembly Monitor (MSP-D). The interference signal reflected by the carrier anĆ
tenna is about 20 to 30 dB greater than the received wanted signal. The worse the matĆ
ching of the antenna the more unfavorable is the signal to noise ratio and the inaccurate
are the monitor measurement values. Possibly it is indicated only less than 30 % of the
9960 Hz modulation depth due to a bad matching of the antennas, especially of the midĆ
dle antenna.
The monitor program used for nextfield monitoring processes both signals of the nextfield dipole and
of the conventional field dipole. Therefore the following procedure is recommended:
1. Adjustment of the installation with conventional farfield monitor (fixed or mobile).

2. Adjustment with nextfield monitor
4.2.6.2 Setup of the Installation with Field Dipole and Monitor
The DVOR installation is commissioned either including nextfield monitor or with nextfield monitor as
supplementary part. First the installation is set to operation with the farfield dipole.
- Close all windows in the ADRACS user program.

- Select 'Adjustments' in the function key bar Î .
- Select windows for 'MON-1' and 'Miscellaneous'.
- Set 'Station type' to 'DVOR Farfield signal' and confirm.
The further setup procedure follows according section 4.3.
The farfield dipole is no longer used after a following change over to operation with nextfield dipoles:
a mobile field dipole remains connected until the end of the setup process, while the solidly installed
dipole can be connected permanently.
Ed. 01.04 AN-13

AN-14 Ed. 01.04

Menu/

The following adjustments have to be carried out at all antennas

according to the station frequency.
4.3.1.1 Plate-Capacitor CA
a) Remove cover of antenna.
b) Read spacing of capacitor plates CA (Fig. 4-3) for the station
frequency from Fig. 4-2 (e.g. 8.2 mm for 115 MHz).
c) Manufacture an appropriate distance piece in a size equal to the
measure found above (e.g. file head of screw to fit).
d) Loosen lock nuts with spanner and set the plates to the proper
distance with the help of distance piece. The two plates should be
set approximately symmetrical to the frame.
e) Tighten capacitor plates with lock nuts. Then check their distance
once again.
4.3.1.2 Quartz Trimmer-Capacitor CTr

Remove antenna cover. Trimmer CTr is located in the center of the
antenna feed (Fig. 4-3). For adjustment, a screwdriver with a long blade
is necessary.
a) Turn CTr carefully (quartz trimmer!) counterclockwise to the stop.
b) Read the number of turns for CTr to adjust station frequency from
Fig. 4-2 (e.g. 11 turns for 115 MHz) and adjust CTr accordingly.
c) Replace cover and fasten it provisionally with 2 or 3 screws.
4.3.1.3 C5 of Matcher/Decoupling Module

(for sideband antennas only)
The matcher/decoupling module and cables are accessible through an
opening in the antenna pedestal, which is closed by a slide.
a) Turn C5 (Fig. 4-3) carefully counterclockwise to the stop.
b) Read the number of of turns for C5 to adjust the station frequency
from by means of Fig. 4-2 (e.g. 9.5 turns for 115 MHz) and adjust
C5 accordingly.
Ed. 01.04 AN-15

Menu/
4.3.2 Test Setup (recommended)

Disconnect matcher/decoupling module from antenna1 and arrange test
setup according to Fig. 4-4. Connect measuring cable via 20 dB
attenuator to FORWARD-output of directional coupler.
NOTE: Other test setups are possible. It depends on the measuring device capaĆ
bilities of the customer.

b) Set carrier power to 10 W. A/TS T1 Carrier power

10 W
c) Set SB1 power to 0. A/TS T1 SBA power

level 0%
d) Set SB2 power to 0. T1 SBB power

level 0%
e) Switch off antenna rotation. The sideband antennas are switched to

50 W termination.
Click 'ON/OFF' icon and select with change destination and
change group the 'ASU Test Commands' and then 'ASU test
no SB radiation'; click 'program TX-1'.
a) Set 'M1 AGC Adjustment' value to 'M1 RF Level' indication of 100 %. A/TS M1 AGC Adjustment
--,- %
NOTE: Range of values: 2...255
b) Connect measuring cable to reflected output of directional coupler
at antenna1 and remove 20 dB attenuator at input of monitor 1.
NOTE: See test setup Fig. 4-4.
c) Set 'M1 RF Level' indication to a minimum by alternately adjusting
both plate capacitors CA (both in the same direction) and CTr of
antenna1.
REMARK: For this measurement the antenna cover must be put on proĆ
visionally and measuring personnel must have moved away
about 7 m from the antenna under test.
NOTE: Nominal value: less then 5 % (min. 26 dB matching).
d) Connect test setup to antenna 2. Reconnect matcher/decoupling
module to antenna 1 normally. Match antenna 2 and then all other
antennas including the center antenna in the same way.
e) After all antennas are measured, repeat procedure and check
antennas 1 to 50 again. If need be readjust.
f) Reconnect center antenna normally and remove test setup.
g) Switch off TX1. C Switch TX1 Off
AN-16 Ed. 01.04

Menu/
4.4 CHECK OF DECOUPLING BETWEEN SIDEBAND

ANTENNAS
4.4.1 Test Setup
Insert test probe into antenna 50 with probe cable running vertically to
counterpoise and then radially to center antenna. Connect it there to
measuring cable which has to be connected via 20 dB attenuator to
input of monitor 1.
a) Select blending function 1 (cw) in BSG-D subassembly.
NOTE: Close DIP-FIX switches S14 and S15.
c) Set CSB power to 0. A/TS T1 Carrier power

0.0 W
d) Set SB2 power to 0. A/TS T1 SBB power

level 0%
e) Set SB1 power to 20 %. A/TS T1 SBA power

level 20.0%
f) Set level of SB1 sine to 50.0 %. A/TS T1 SBA SINUS Blen-

ding 50.0%
g) Set level of SB1 cosine to 50.0 %. A/TS T1 SBA COSINUS

Blending 50.0%

a) Switch through to antenna 50. Choose in the 'TX Settings' window
the command 'T1 Start Antenna Single Step' and select 'Antenna 50'.
REMARK: Do not use this command when working with an antenna
simulator.
---,- %

c) Switch through to antenna 49. Choose in the 'Antenna Adjustment
TX1' window the command 'T1 Start Antenna Single Step' and
select 'Antenna 49'.
d) Remove 20 dB attenuator from input of monitor 1. The indication
now displays the decoupling value. Reading should be <160 %
(min. 16 dB decoupling). If decoupling is lower (<16 dB)
check that C5 of matcher/decoupling module of antenna 50 is
properly set (see Fig. 4-2) or wether a cable connection is faulty.
NOTE: Measuring personnel must move away to center antenna.
Ed. 01.04 AN-17

Menu/
REMARK: If C5 of matcher/decoupling module has to be readĆ

justed, the matching of the neighboring antennas has to
be checked again and readjusted if necessary.
e) Insert test probe into antenna 49 and switch through to antenna 48 A/TS
by decrementing. 'M1 RF Level' indicates now decoupling of
antenna 49, which should be again < 160 %. Continue in this
manner until all sideband antennas have been checked.
g) Select blending function 4 of BSG-D subassembly.

NOTE: Open DIP-FIX-switches S14 and S15.
h) Remove test probe and connect inputs of monitors normally again.
AN-18 Ed. 01.04

Menu/
4.5.1 Preparations
NOTE: This procedure using the test generator on the CSL is not
applicable with installed nextfield monitor option !
Ed. 01.04 AN-19

Menu/
AN-20 Ed. 01.04

Menu/

4.6.1.1 Basic Settings
a) Connect the power meter to the CSB output.
c) Set 30 Hz AM mod. depth to 0 %. A/TS T1 Mod. Depth

30Hz AM 0 %
d) Set identity mod. depth to 0 %. A/TS T1 Mod. Depth

Identity 0 %
e) Set voice mod. depth to 0 %. A/TS T1 Mod. Depth Voice

0%
f) Set CSB power to nominal value (30 W or up to 100 W). A/TS T1 Carrier Power
Measure the power. ---,- W
NOTE: If there is a difference between the nominal power and the meaĆ
sured power adjust the power by means of R1 of the Control CouĆ
pler (CCP-D), refer to Fig. 4-6 (BP-T,X16).
g) Preset levels of blending functions (sine and cosine) for SB1

and SB2:

ding --,-%
Blending --,-%
- SB2-S A/TS T1 SBB SINUS Blen-
ding --,-%
Blending --,-%
NOTE: Up to 50 W: 30 %, with 100 W: 50 %.

h) Set SB1- and SB2-power to 40 %:
- SB1 A/TS T1 SBA Power Level

40 %
- SB2 A/TS T1 SBB Power Level
40 %
i) Switch off TX1. C Switch TX1 Off
j) Disconnect the power meter.
Ed. 01.04 AN-21

Menu/
4.6.1.2 RF Phasing (Carrier Sideband)

NOTE: Not applicable with VOR receiver. Use cable connection (appr. 200 m).
---,- %
c) Select single-channel mode for monitor 1 (9960 Hz AM AM-Det.) A/TS M1 Single Channel
9960 Hz AM AM-Det
d) Connect oscilloscope to P16 of MSP-VD/1 (see Fig. 4-6)

(comp.-signal).
NOTE: Horizontal deflection: 5 ms/cm.
e) Shift SBA RF phase in bigger steps at first, then in smaller steps A/TS T1 SBA RF Phase
for a max. 9960 Hz mod. depth reading. At the same time check --- °
on scope that max. 9960 Hz mod. depth coincides roughly with
min. distortion mod. depth on 9960 Hz signal.
f) Switch off single-channel mode of monitor 1. A/TS M1 Single Channel
OFF
4.6.1.3 Equality Check of Levels of Blending Signals

a) Measure levels of the demodulated blending signals using the scope
at the following test points on ASU motherboard A, connector TEST
(Fig. 4-7):
1b5 : SB1-S
1b7 : SB1-C
1b6 : SB2-S
1b8 : SB2-C
b) If difference of levels is greater than 5 % correct levels using the
of following commands:
- SB1-S (SBA SINUS Blending) A/TS T1 SBA SINUS
Blending --,-%
- SB1-C (SBA COSINUS Blending) A/TS T1 SBA COSINUS
Blending --,-%
- SB2-S (SBB SINUS Blending) A/TS T1 SBB SINUS
Blending --,-%
- SB2-C (SBB COSINUS Blending) A/TS T1 SBB COSINUS
Blending --,-%
c) If corrections in b) were necessary, repeat RF phasing (4.6.1.2).
a) Adjust all levels of blending signals (set in 4.6.1.1 resp. 4.6.1.3) by a A/TS T1 Alignment all
constant factor for a 30 % reading of the 9960 Hz AM mod. depth. Blending levels
- --,-%
Factor= 30 % x (100 % / measurement value)
REMARK: Read out and note down the individual levels of the blending signals
for later check.
AN-22 Ed. 01.04

Menu/
b) Minimize SB1 power: Connect scope to 1b5 and 1b7 of connector A/TS T1 SBA Power Level
TEST on motherboard ASU/A. Reduce SB1-power until clipping of --,-%
peaks of sinus signal. Then increase SB1 power by 5 % (relative).
NOTE: Range of values: 0...99.9, note down value!
c) Minimize SB2 power: Connect scope to 1b6 and 1b8 on A/TS T1 SBB Power Level
TEST card and perform as described in b). --,-%
NOTE: Range of value: 0...99.9, note down value!

a) Set 'T1 Mod. Depth 30 Hz AM' so that 'M1 Mod. Depth 30 Hz AM' A/TS T1 Mod. Depth
becomes 30 %. 30 Hz AM --,-%
4.6.1.6 Preadjustment of Azimuth

a) Set "Start Antenna Normal Operation" to antenna 1. A/TS T1 Start Antenna
Normal Operation
Antenna-1
b) Set azimuth alignment of transmitter to obtain the azimuth reading T1 Azimuth alignment
of the monitor dipole. ---,-°
NOTE: Measurement only with field dipole in use,distance >100 m. Range

of values: 0...359.9 (assume 0, if working with simulator test setup).
4.6.1.7 Identity- and Voice-Adjustment

a) Set mod. depth identity to e.g. 10 %. A/TS T1 Mod. Depth
Identity AM --,- %

b) If applicable set mod. depth voice to e.g. 20 %. A/TS T1 Mod. Depth
Voice AM --,- %

c) Switch off TX1. C Switch TX1 Off
Ed. 01.04 AN-23

Menu/

b) Switch over to TX2 C Set TX2 Aerial
Set TX2 in the same way as described for TX1 in 4.6.1. Continue to use A/TS TX settings
monitor 1 for monitor indications. Therefore omit 4.6.1.2 b) (do not
change the AGC value of monitor 1 again), but check that the RF level
indication is 100±5 %. Use activity mask A/TS 'TX Settings'.
4.6.3 Setting and Check of Monitor2
Switch on TX1. C Switch TX1 On
a) RF level
Set 'M2 AGC Adjustment' value to 'M2 RF Level' indication of 100 %. A/MC M2 AGC Adjustment
--,- %
b) 30 Hz AM mod. depth A/MC M2āMod.Depth

Check the 'M2 Mod. Depth 30 Hz AM' reading. ā30Hz AM

c) Subcarrier A/MC Mon 2 Measurement
ca) Check the 'M2 Mod. Depth 9960 Hz AM' reading.
cb) Check the 'M2 Mod. Index 30 Hz FM' reading.
d) Azimuth A/MC Mon 2 Measurement
Check the 'M2 Azimuth' reading.
NOTE: Use window 'MON2 Measurement. Nominal value: same as in
4.6.1.6b), ±0.2
Check following monitor 2 indications:

a) RF level. A/MC M2 RF-Level
NOTE: Nominal value: 100 ±5 %.

b) 30 Hz AM mod. depth. A/MC M2 Mod. Depth 30Hz
AM
AN-24 Ed. 01.04

Menu/
c) 9960 Hz mod. depth. A/MC M2 Mod. Depth 9960
Hz AM

d) 30 Hz FM mod. index. A/MC M2 Mod. Index 30Hz
FM

e) Azimuth A/MC M2 AZIMUTH
NOTE: Same as in 4.6.1.6b), ±0.2 %.

Ed. 01.04 AN-25

Menu/
4.7 RECORDING OF ERROR CURVE

b) Note down 'T1 Azimuth Alignment' value. A/EC
NOTE: Important for h)

c) Shift 'T1 Azimuth Alignment' for a 'M1 Azimuth Dipole 1' reading A/EC T1 Azimuth alignment
of 000.0° ---,-°
NOTE: Range of value: 0...359.9. This measurement is performed with diĆ

pole 1 only
d) Record in test sheet (Fig. 4-8) reading of 'M1 Azimuth Dipole 1'
(e.g. 0.0°) as 1st value.
e) Set "Start Antenna Normal Operation" to antenna 3 and record A/EC T1 Start Antenna
reading of 'M1 Azimuth Dipole 1' as 2nd value in test sheet. Normal Operation
Antenna-3
f) Incrementing the next but one antenna is selected as 30 Hz phase

reference. Record azimuth reading of 'M1 Azimuth Dipole1'. Con-
tinue this way until all 25 measurement values have been recorded.
The measured values have to increment in steps of 14.4°. Record
the differences from these nominal values in the error column.
A typical error spread is <±0.4°.
g) Set "Start Antenna Normal Operation" to antenna1. A/EC T1 Start Antenna
Normal Operation
h) Key in azimuth value noted down in in b) again. A/EC T1 Azimuth alignment

---,-°

Perform an error curve measurement for TX2 in the same way as for
TX1 (4.7.1).
AN-26 Ed. 01.04

Menu/

4.8.1 Monitor 1
4.8.1.1 Azimuth
a) Choose azimuth value 'M1 Azimuth'. A/AL1 Alarm Limits M1
(equal to azimuth value of monitor dipole 1).
b) Upper limit: Add 1.0° to 'M1 Azimuth' reading and key in this value. A/AL1 M1 Azimuth Upper
Limit ---,- °
c) Lower limit: Subtract 1.0° from 'M1 Azimuth' reading and key in A/AL1 M1 Azimuth Lower
this value. Limit ---,- °
NOTE: Range of values: 0...359.9;

If during flight check azimuth of transmitters has to be changed,
these azimuth alarm limits have to be readjusted.
4.8.1.2 RF-Level
a) Upper limit, e.g. 123 %. A/AL1 M1 RF Level Upper
Limit --- %
b) Lower limit, e.g. 71 %. A/AL1 M1 RF Level Lower

Limit --- %
NOTE: Range of values: Upper Limit 100...150, Lower Limit 50...100.
4.8.1.3 30 Hz AM Signal
a) Upper limit, e.g. 34.5 %. A/AL1 M1 Mod. Depth 30 Hz
AM UL --,- %
b) Lower limit, e.g. 25.5 %. A/AL1 M1 Mod. Depth 30 Hz

AM LL --,- %
4.8.1.4 9960 Hz Signal

a) Upper limit, e.g. 34.5 %. A/AL1 M1 Mod. Depth 9960
Hz AM UL --,- %
b) Lower limit, e.g. 25.5 %. A/AL1 M1 Mod. Depth 9960

Hz AM LL --,- %
4.8.1.5 30 Hz FM Signal
a) Upper limit, e.g. 18.4. A/AL1 M1 Mod. Index 30 Hz
FM UL --,-
b) Lower limit, e.g. 13.6. A/AL1 M1 Mod. Index 30 Hz

FM LL --,-
Ed. 01.04 AN-27

Menu/
4.8.1.6 RF Phase
a) Choose RF phase 'T1 RF-Phase Measurement'. A/AL1
b) Upper limit: Add 20° to 'T1 RF-Phase Measurement' reading A/AL1 T1 RF Phase Upper
c) Lower limit: Subtract 20° from 'T1 RF-Phase Measurement' reading A/AL1 T1 RF Phase Lower
4.8.1.7 9960 Hz Distortion (not applicable with Nextfield)

a) Choose 'M1 Distortion on 9960 Hz AM' reading. A/AL1
b) Upper limit: Multiply 'M1 Distortion on 9960 Hz AM' reading A/AL1 M1 Distortion on
by 1.2 and key in this value, however max. 60 %. 9960 Hz UL --,-%

c) Lower limit: Key in 0.0 %. A/AL1 M1 Distortion on
9960 Hz LL 0%
4.8.1.8 30 Hz FM Distortion (not applicable with Nextfield)

a) Choose 'M1 Distortion on 30 Hz FM' reading. A/AL1
b) Limit: Add 2 % to 'M1 Distortion on 30 Hz FM' reading and key in A/AL1 M1 Distortion on 30
this value as upper limit, however max. 5 %. Hz FM UL --,- %
4.8.1.9 Distortion of SSB Signal (ME 10 kHz)

a) Choose 'M1 Distortion on det. LSB' reading. A/AL1
b) Upper limit: Add 3 % to 'M1 Distortion on det. LSB' reading A/AL1 M1 Dist. on det. LSB
and key in this value, however max. 15 %. UL --,- %
c) Lower limit: Key in half value of 'M1 Distortion on det. LSB' A/AL1 M1 Dist. on det. LSB
reading . LL --,- %
NOTE: Range of values: 0... 99.9
4.8.1.10 Distortion Difference Signal (SB MON)

a) Choose 'M1 Distortion on det. USB-LSB' reading. A/AL1
b) Upper limit: Add 20 % to indication and key in this value, A/AL1 M1 Dist. on det. USB
however max. 80 %. -LSB UL --,-%

c) Lower limit: Key in 0.0 %. A/AL1 M1 Dist. on det. USB
-LSB LL 0 %
AN-28 Ed. 01.04

Menu/
4.8.1.11 Identity AM Signal (not applicable with Nextfield)

a) (Upper limit, e.g. 11.5 %.) A/AL1 M1 Mod. Depth Iden-
tity AM UL --,- %
b) (Lower limit, e.g. 8.5 %.) A/AL1 M1 Mod. Depth Iden-

tity AM LL --,- %
4.8.1.12 Alarm Delay

Set delay to e.g. 30 s. A/AL1 M1 Alarm Delay
--- s
4.8.2 Monitor 2
Set alarm limits for monitor 2 in the same way as described for A/AL2 Alarm Limits M2
monitor 1 in section 4.8.1. Use Activity mask A/AL2 'Alarm Limits M2'.

NOTE: The floating battery must be installed and connected.
Use activities mask 'BCPS/BAT' A/BAT
a) Enter installed battery capacity. A/BAT Installed Batt. Capa

city ---.- Ah
b) When the Battery is fully charged, set 'Set Batt. Charge Level' to A/BAT Set Batt. Charge
the same value (Installed Capacity = Charge Level). Level ---.- Ah
NOTE: Divide Installed Capacity by 500 Ah. The battery is fully charged,
when 'battery current' indicates this value.
c) Check alarm limits (UL and LL) for battery half voltage, battery full A/BAT Batt. half Voltage UL
voltage and battery current. Batt. half Voltage LL
Batt. full Voltage UL
Batt. full Voltage LL
Batt. Current UL/LL
Ed. 01.04 AN-29

Menu/
4.10 SETTING OF NEXTFIELD MONITOR

a) Close all windows in the ADRACS user program.
b) Select 'Adjustments' in the function key bar. Select windows for
'MON-1' and 'Miscellaneous'. Set 'Stationtype' to 'DVOR Nearfield
Î MON-1
DVOR Nearfield 1
1 Dipole' and confirm. Dipole
NOTE: For 2 nextfield dipoles set to 'DVOR Nearfield 2 Dipoles'
c) Set window with 'Adjustments' to 'MON-1' and 'Calibration'. Set

other window to 'MON-1 Measurement'.
Î MON-1
Adjust AGC values (AGC RF-level and AGC RF-level CSB internal) AGC RF-Level
so, that in 'MON-1 Measurement' the RF-level of the monitor ---,- % and
indicate100 %. AGC RF-Level CSB
If need be select insertion of 16 dB AGC RF-level attenuation. internal ---,- %
NOTE: The value for 'RF-Level CSB internal'should be right because it
was adjusted during acceptance and processes internal levels
only. It has to be re-adjusted if the carrier power is changed. The
value can be lost, if the battery backup jumper on MSP is opened.
d) If need be adjust 'M1 Mod. Depth 30Hz AM' to reading of 30 %±5 %. M1 Calibrate Mod.
depth 30Hz AM
---,- %
e) Adjust modulation depth of 9960 Hz AM to maximum with poten-
tiometers at the front of the MDS-D (see Fig. 4-1), R409 influences
the signal of monitor 1, R414 the signal of monitor 2. It is recom-
mended to check result of step c).
NOTE: The sideband signal (USB and LSB) is received by the carrier anĆ
tenna and is coupled out in the directional coupler. The resultant of
these sidebands has to be in phase with the carrier to obtain a maxiĆ
mum and stable 9960 Hz signal. Depending on the frequency and
the cable length one or two maxima are got during adjustment of the
maximum modulation depth. The maximum must not exist at the end
of the setting range.
MDS-D ASU INT
MON2 Phase R414

MON1 Phase R409
Fig. 4-1 Position of potentiometer on the MDS-D
AN-30 Ed. 01.04

Menu/
f) Set 'M1 AGC Level 9960Hz AM' to 'M1 Mod. Depth 9960Hz AM' M1 AGC Level
indication of 30 %. 9960Hz AM
--,- %
g) Set 'M1 AGC 30Hz FM LSB' to 'M1 30Hz FM LSB Level Dipole-1' M1āAGCā30HzāFMāLSB
indication in the range of 0,7 ... 0,8 V. --,- %
h) Set 'M1 AGC 30Hz FM USB' to 'M1 30Hz FM USB Level Dipole-1' M1āAGCā30HzāFMāUSB
indication in the range of 0,7 ... 0,8 V. --,- %
i) If necessary adjust Mod.Index 'M1 Calibrate Mod. Index 30Hz FM' . M1āCalibrate Mod.
Index 30Hz FM
NOTE: Depends on transmitter frequency; nominal value 16±2

j) Set all further values according to section 4.8. Set alarm limits sym-
metrically related to the nextfield monitor measurement values.

Set monitor 2 the same way as described for MON 1 in section 4.10.1.
Ed. 01.04 AN-31

Menu/

a) Equipment is aligned according to Sections 4.1 to 4.8.
b) Mains and DC supply are switched on and PC login procedure has
been executed.
c) Carry out section 4.11.2 for TX1 as MAIN or alternatively section
4.11.3 for TX2 as MAIN.
4.11.2 TX1 Main

Set TX1 to Aerial. C Set TX1 Aerial
b) Select function key 'Configuration' and check that no MONITOR

ALARM or BITE WARNING is on. Otherwise click on the BITE
WARNING field (TX1) to get the list 'Checks on NAV-System' which
indicates all Alarms and Warnings.
NOTE: Allow system approx. 30 s for initialization.
c) Monitor 1/2 bypass OFF. C Set both MON By-
pass off
d) Simulate monitor 1 and 2 alarm by e.g. disconnecting monitor

inputs and check that after selected alarm delay TX1 is switched
off and TX2 is switched on. Remove monitor alarm conditions
immediately after change over.
e) Check that no MONITOR ALARM or BITE WARNING is on, otherwise
click on the BITE WARNING field (TX2) to get the list 'Checks on
NAV-System' which indicates all Alarms and Warnings. Locate and
eliminate fault.
f) Simulate monitor alarms again and check that after selected alarm
delay TX2 is switched off. Afterwards remove alarm conditions
again.
NOTE: Both TX must be off now.
g) Switch on TX1. C Switch TX1 On
h) Monitor 1/2 bypass OFF. C Set both MON By-

pass off
NOTE: Check that NORMAL indication is on.
4.11.3 TX2 Main

Carry out 4.11.2 for TX2.
AN-32 Ed. 01.04

Menu/
4.12 FLIGHT CHECK

The following describes a standard flight-check-procedure. However
range and sequence of this procedure may vary depending on the
individual flight check crew.
a) System has been out of operation:
aa) Switch on all AC/DC-Converter
ab) Switch on fuse switches of batteries
ac) Switch on switches TX1/TX2 on PMM (and NAV with PMM-5)
ad) Switch on TX1/2 C Switch both TX On
b) System has been in NORMAL operation:

ba) Switch on monitor bypass C Set both MON By-
pass on

NOTE: TX1 must be on "AERIAL", and both "MONITOR BYPASS" must be "ON".
PC is connected.

a) Check 30 Hz mod. depth indication: 'M1 Mod. Depth 30 Hz AM'
b) Change 30 Hz AM mod. depth for desired value according to A/FC T1 Mod. Depth 30Hz
announcement of Flight Check Engineer. AM --,- %
NOTE: Range of values: 0...40. Note value !

c) Recalibrate 30 Hz mod. depth indication of monitor 1 for 30 %. A/MC M1 Calibrate Mod.
(Recommendation: Perform this after flight check) Depth 30 Hz AM
--,- %
4.12.2.2 9960 Hz Mod. Depth

a) In case of required mod. depth increase: Increase SB1+SB2 power A/FC T1 Alignment
so that the signal is not limited (see also 4.6.1.4 b), leaving a margin SBA+SBB Power
for adjustments in c) and d) ---,- %
NOTE: Omit a) in case of mod. depth decrease.

b) Choose 9960Hz mod. depth indication 'M1 Mod. Depth 9960Hz AM'.
c) Change 9960 Hz mod. depth for desired value according to A/FC T1 Alignment all
announcement of Flight Check Engineer as described in Blending Levels
section 4.6.1.4. ---,- %
d) Recalibrate 9960 Hz mod. depth indication of monitor1 for 30 % A/MC M1 Calibrate Mod.
(Recommendation: Perform this after flight check) Depth 9960 Hz
---,- %
Ed. 01.04 AN-33

Menu/
4.12.2.3 Azimuth
a) Watch azimuth indication: 'M1 Azimuth'
b) Change azimuth for desired value according to announcement of A/FC T1 Azimuth Align-
Flight Check Engineer. Record azimuth indication. ment ---,- °
NOTE: Range of values: 0...359.9. Note new value.

c) Add 1.0° to azimuth indication and key in this value as upper limit. A/AL1 M1 Azimuth Upper
(Recommendation: Perform this after flight check) Limit ---,- °
d) Subtract 1.0° from azimuth indication and key in this value as A/AL1 M1 Azimuth Lower
lower limit (Recommendation: Perform this after flight check). Limit ---,- °
4.12.2.4 Identity Modulation Depth

a) Check Ident. mod depth indication: 'M1 Mod. Depth Identity AM'
b) Change Ident. mod. depth for desired value according to A/FC T1 Mod. Depth Iden-
announcement of Flight Check Engineer. tity AM --,- %

c) (Recalibrate 'Mod. Depth Identity AM Indication' for 10 % for both A/MC M1 Calibrate Mod.
monitors.) Depth Ident.
Not applicable with Nextfield Monitoring! M2 Calibrate Mod.
Depth Ident.
4.12.2.5 Voice Modulation Depth

Change voice mod. depth for desired value according to announcement A/FC T1 Mod. Depth
of Flight Check Engineer. Voice AM --,- %

Correct TX2 in the same way as described for TX1 in section 4.12.1, A/FC
however set the 30 Hz AM and 9960 Hz mod. depth, 30 Hz FM mod.
index, azimuth, identity and voice mod. depth of TX2 in order to obtain
the same monitor indications as for TX1. Later, the settings of TX2
have to be confirmed by flight check.
NOTE: Switch off TX1 and then Switch on TX2. Verify that both MONITOR
BYPASS are on.

Correct monitor 2 in the same way as described for monitor1 in 4.12.2 A/MC
and 4.12.3, but do not change transmitter adjustments. Use activity mask A/AL2
A/MC 'Monitor Calibration' and A/AL2 'Alarm Limits M2'.
a) The monitor alarm limits can be checked either by means of TX1
or TX2. The following describes this check with TX1 as main TX.
b) Change of alarm limits - if necessary - can be carried out as
described in Section 4.8.
AN-34 Ed. 01.04

Menu/
4.12.5.1 Azimuth Alarm

a) Check azimuth indication 'M1 Azimuth' and 'M2 Azimuth'. A/FC
Remember this values and azimuth value of transmitter.
b) Upper limit:
Change remembered azimuth value by approx. +1° (old value +1) A/FC T1 Azimuth Align-
until both monitors alarm. ment ---,- °
c) Lower limit:
Change remembered azimuth value by approx. -1° (old value -1) A/FC T1 Azimuth Align-
until bothmonitors alarm. ment ---,- °

d) After check by Flight Check Engineer key in remembered azimuth
value again, see a).
4.12.5.2 30 Hz AM Modulation Depth Alarm

a) Check 30 Hz AM mod. depth indication 'M1 Mod. Depth 30 Hz AM' A/FC
and 'M2 Mod. Depth 30 Hz AM'.
b) Record 30 Hz AM mod. depth value of 'T1 Mod. Depth 30 Hz AM'.
c) Reduce 30 Hz mod. depth by approx. 15% until both monitors alarm. A/FC T1 Mod.Depth 30 Hz
AM --,- %

d) After check by Flight Check Engineer key in recorded value of b) A/FC T1 Mod.Depth 30 Hz
again AM --,- %
4.12.5.3 9960 Hz Modulation Depth Alarm

a) Check 9960 Hz mod. depth indication 'M1 Mod. Depth 9960 Hz AM' A/FC
and 'M2 Mod. Depth 9960 Hz AM'
b) Remember levels of blending signals 'T1 SBA Sinus Blending',
'T1 SBA Cosinus Blending', 'T1 SBB Sinus Blending', 'T1 SBB
Cosinus Blending'.
c) Reduce 9960 Hz mod. depth until both monitors alarm by a A/FC T1 Alignment all
multiplier (approx. 85 %) blending levels --,-
NOTE: Range of values: 80.0...120.0. Key in first 88.0 and then 99.0 and
increment down.
d) Upon completion of check by the Flight Check Engineer key in A/FC T1 SBA sinus blen-
recorded value of b) again. ding --,-%
T1 SBA cosinus blen-
ding --,-%
T1 SBB sinus blen-
ding --,-%
T1 SBB cosinus blen-
ding --,-%
Ed. 01.04 AN-35

Menu/

a) TX1 Main C Set TX1 Aerial
or or
TX2 Main C Set TX2 Aerial
b) Switch off Standby TX2 C Switch TX2 Off

or or
Switch off Standby TX1 C Switch TX1 off
c) Switch off Bypass Monitor 1. C Set MON1 Bypass off

Switch off Bypass Monitor 2. C Set MON2 Bypass off
NOTE: With 'Monitor Bypass Off' the possibly running Standby transmitter
is switched off.
d) Switch to REMOTE with key-lock switch on the Local Control
Interface.
AN-36 07.03
Ed. 01.04

CTr C5 CA
(Rotations) [mm]
14
26 13
24 12
22 11
CA
Loop
20 10
18 9
16 8
14 7
12 6
CTr
10 5 Matching transformer
8 4
C5
6 3 matcher/decoupling module
4 2
2 1
0
108.0 108.5 109.0 109.5 110.0 110.5 111.0 111.5 112.0 112.5 113.0 113.5 114.0 114.5 115.0 115.5 116.0 116.5 117.0 117.5 118.0 118.5 119.0 MHz
Fig. 4-2 Setting characteristics for DVOR-antenna

Antenna dome, top view Matcher/Decoupling module
Lock nuts
X2
C5 to antenna
CA
CTr
CA
Spacing a X4* X3*
X1
* decoupling module only
Fig. 4-3 Position of capacitors CA, CTr (antenna dome), C5 (matcher/decoupling module)
Ed. 01.04 AN-37

Antenna
Test cable (10m)
Supply cable for middle antenna

Directional coupler
Return Forward
Test cable (30 m)
Decoupling
module x)
10 W
20 dB
CSB
Monitor 1 TX
x) with SB antennas only
Fig. 4-4 Test setup for matching measurements for DVOR-antenna

1...50
ASU PMC Simulator Transmitter

cabinet
CSB TEST SB Monitor

(= 8 dBm) O/P (= 0 dBm) I/P
R1
(= 10 dB)
R3 (50 W) R2
Directional
coupler
20 dB
3-dB
Fig. 4-5 Simulator test setup for DVOR
AN-38 Ed. 01.04


ÊÊ ÊÊ
Position of measurement
ÊÊ X94 X93 X92
X87
X80
X86 X79
X85
X78
X82
ÊÊ
ÊÊ ÊÊ
point P16 on MSP-VD control line BCPS
X99 X98 X97 X96 X77 X76 X84
front BP-C
X73
X74
ÊÊ ÊÊ
X83
V2 X95 -3 - 1
X72 X71 -4 - 2
V3
V1 X7
X22 X8
ÊÊ ÊÊ
ÊÊ BP-T X71
X70 X84
X81 ÊÊ
Ê Ê
X83
(TX1) X72
X85 X82
Ê CA-100/1*
Ê CCP-D
Probe
ÊÊ X16
X80 ÊÊ
ÊÊ ÊÊ
R1
P16 X70
BP-T X71 X84
X81
ÊÊ ÊÊ
X83
X72
(TX2) X85 X82
not assembled on
ÊÊ X16
X80 ÊÊ
ÊÊ ÊÊ
MSP-VD, Ref. No. 83135 22301
PMM
NAV, TX1, TX2

Ê Ê
ÊÊ ÊÊ
rear BP-DC
CA-100/2*
Ê Ê
ÊÊ ÊÊ *Version 100 W
ÊÊ ÊÊ
ÊÊ
Ê Ê
ÊÊ ÊÊ
control line BCPS
BP-BCPS***
*** Version 50 W
Fig. 4-6 Transmitter rack, rear side, potentiometers on CCP-D
Ed. 01.04 AN-39

Connector panel
Ê Ê
ÊÊ ÊÊ
ÊÊ MB ASU/A ÊÊ
ÊÊ ÊÊ
connector TEST
solder side
ÊÊ ÊÊ
A1/1
BA
1
ÊÊ ÊÊ
32
TEST
MB ASU/B
Ê Ê
Ê Ê
ÊÊ ÊÊ
Ê Ê
ÊÊ ÊÊ
ÊÊ ÊÊ
ÊÊ ÊÊ
ÊÊ ÊÊ
Ê Ê
ÊÊ ÊÊ
ÊÊ ÊÊ
ÊÊ
ÊÊ BP-BCPS*** ÊÊ
Ê Mains connection and mains filter
Ê
Rear *** Version 100 W
Fig. 4-7 ASU rack, rear side, position of connector TEST, motherboard A
AN-40 Ed. 01.04

Test log (sample)
TX1 TX2
Ant. No. Nom./° Act./° Error/° Act./° Error/°
(Nom.-Act.) (Nom.-Act.)
1 0,0°
3 14,4°
5 28,8°
7 43,2°
9 57,6°
11 72,0°
13 86,4°
15 100,8°
17 115,2°
19 129,6°
21 144,0°
23 158,4°
25 172,8°
27 187,2°
29 201,6°
31 216,0°
33 230,4°
35 244,8°
37 259,2°
39 273,6°
41 288,0°
43 302,4°
45 316,8°
47 331,2°
49 345,6°
Error spread TX1: TX2:
Fig. 4-8 Test log for error plot
Ed. 01.04 AN-41

4.13 RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN THE MONITOR DISPLAY OF

THE RF LEVEL AND THE POWER
The CSB output power is displayed by the monitor as the RF level. This display does not correspond
to the direct power but is a voltage display. The power must be converted to a voltage in order to be
able to set an alarm limit, e.g. ±20 % power change.
dB= 10 log P1/P2
V e.g. alarm limit for -20 % power change

dB =10 log P1/P2 ; P1 = 0.8 P2
dB =10 log 0.8 P2/P2
dB =10 log 0.8
dB =-0.9691
V e.g. alarm limit for +20 % power change

dB =10 log P1/P2 ; P1=1.2 P2
dB =10 log 1.2 P2/P2
dB =10 log 1.2
dB = 0.7918
Conversion of power change to a voltage change (U is used instead of V)
dB= 10 log P1/P2 ; P1= U12/R ; P2= U22/R (U is according to the RF-level)
dB = 10 log (U12/R) / (U22/R)
dB = 10 log U12/U22
dB = 20 log U1/U2
dB/20= log U1/U2
10dB/20= U1/U2
U 1= U2 x 10dB/20
If the above and below formulae are combined the result is as follows:
U1=U2 x 100.5 log P1 / P2
The conversion yields the following relationship: U12/U22 = P1/P2

These formulae can be converted to determine the associated power change from the monitor display
of the RF level.
P 1= P2 x 102 log U1 / U2
AN-42 Ed. 01.04

Operation and Maintenance General
CHAPTER 5
MAINTENANCE
5.1 GENERAL
5.2 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
5.2.1 Elimination of Static Charges
5.2.2 Damage check
5.2.3 Cleaning
5.2.4 Documentation of System Data
Download and Upload of transmitter and monitor data is performed with the ADRACS program. For
DVOR with nextfield option there are two data sets available depending on wether the station type
"DVOR Farfield" or "DVOR Nextfield" is selected. When performing this action regard station type.
CAUTION
Ensure always that the correct data are uploaded or downloaded which concern to the
station type. Otherwise wrong data values are loaded. The data set must concern to the
station type selected !
Ed. 01.04 AN-43

AN-44 Ed. 01.04

Dvor 432

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Dvor 432

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Dvor 432

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Reference No.

VHF Omnidirectional Radio Range

As for details, the electrical and mechanical information given in the

All rights reserved

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

The equipment documentation comprises:

Part Technical Manuals Code No.

Volume Drawing Set Code No.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

PART CONTENTS CODE NO.

Cautions call attention to methods Warnings call attention to methods,

NOTE or REMARK : For more information about operations.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Table of effective pages

Pages Ed.-No. Remarks

Annex 01.04 DVOR Nextfield (optional)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

2.4.5 Installation of the Monitor Dipole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

2.6.6 Measuring the Ground Resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35

CHAPTER 3 OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Ed. 01.04 III

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

CHAPTER 4 ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

CHAPTER 5 MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

CHAPTER 6 FAULT LOCATION AND REPAIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

6.2.1.1.3 Handling Electrostatically Sensitive Subassemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Ed. 01.04 VII

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

VIII Ed. 01.04

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Ed. 01.04 AV-1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

AV-2 Ed. 01.04

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Ed. 01.04 AV-3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

AV-4 Ed. 01.04

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Ed. 01.04 AV-5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

FAA Federal Aviation Administration

AV-6 Ed. 01.04

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Ed. 01.04 AV-7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

AV-8 Ed. 01.04

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Ed. 01.04 AV-9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine